Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Metric Tutorials
August 2006
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio
MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, 3ds max, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator
Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Inventor,
Autodesk (logo), Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View,
Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, backdraft, Biped, bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw,
CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), cleaner, Codec Central, combustion, Design Your World, Design
Your World (logo), EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, IntroDV, Kinetix, lustre,
MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo),
ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual,
Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat,
Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD
LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built
with ObjectARX (logo), burn, Buzzsaw.com, CAiCE, Cinestream, Civil 3D, cleaner central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content
Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer,
Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready
(logo),Heads-up Design, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, Real-time
Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Part 1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Part 2
Part 3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 112
. 112
. 119
. 120
. 122
. 129
. 129
. 131
. 134
. 136
. 136
. 137
. 139
. 140
Contents | v
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 144
. 144
. 148
. 154
. 157
. 158
. 160
. 161
. 161
. 163
. 166
. 166
. 167
. 173
. 181
. 194
. 197
. 200
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 204
. 204
. 207
. 207
. 217
. 218
. 223
. 227
. 229
. 230
. 234
. 235
. 239
. 239
. 241
. 243
. 243
. 245
. 245
Part 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 248
. 248
. 251
. 251
. 257
. 261
. 262
. 268
. 269
. 269
. 271
. 273
vi | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 281
. 287
. 289
. 291
. 291
. 293
. 294
. 295
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 300
. 300
. 304
. 306
. 309
. 312
. 312
. 314
. 318
. 319
. 321
. 321
. 324
. 326
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 330
. 330
. 331
. 333
. 336
. 336
. 337
. 338
. 338
. 341
. 342
. 342
. 344
. 345
. 348
. 348
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 353
. 353
. 355
. 356
. 360
. 361
. 362
. 365
. 365
. 368
. 370
. 374
. 376
. 383
. 383
. 390
Contents | vii
Part 5
Part 6
Creating
Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 420
. 420
. 425
. 428
. 430
. 433
. 434
. 435
. 442
. 444
. 449
. 461
. 464
. 468
. 468
. 475
. 478
. 487
. 493
. 496
. 498
. 498
. 500
. 502
. 502
. 502
. 503
. 504
. 505
. 506
. 508
. 510
. 510
. 512
. 512
. 514
. 515
. 515
. 518
. 526
. 528
. 528
. 534
Part 7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 540
. 540
. 541
. 544
. 544
. 550
. 554
. 557
. 560
. 560
. 562
. 565
. 574
. 574
. 575
. 579
. 579
. 583
. 588
. 593
. 595
. 595
. 600
. 602
. 602
. 605
. 605
. 606
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 612
. 612
. 621
. 623
. 623
. 626
. 628
. 631
. 631
. 633
. 636
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 642
. 642
. 646
. 648
. 650
. 653
. 655
. 657
. 658
. 660
. 660
. 661
. 662
Contents | ix
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 676
. 676
. 681
. 683
. 683
. 684
. 687
. 690
. 690
. 693
. 693
. 696
. 700
. 702
. 705
. 710
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 714
. 714
. 715
. 716
. 717
. 717
. 719
. 720
. 721
. 723
. 724
. 726
. 727
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 730
. 730
. 736
. 740
. 742
. 749
. 753
. 755
. 759
. 760
x | Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 764
. 764
. 765
. 773
. 776
. 777
. 781
. 792
. 798
. 799
. 800
. 802
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 810
. 810
. 810
. 813
. 817
. 821
. 825
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 832
. 832
. 842
. 849
Part 8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 865
. 865
. 873
. 876
. 879
. 881
. 881
. 882
. 885
. 887
. 888
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 894
. 894
. 896
. 898
. 899
. 901
. 901
. 905
. 907
. 909
. 913
. 916
. 917
. 919
. 919
. 920
. 925
. 927
. 930
. 931
. 932
. 934
Contents | xi
xii | Contents
Getting Started
Introduction
This introduction helps you get started with the Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 tutorials and presents the
fundamental concepts of the product, including:
Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units.
Common file names have a c_ prefix.
Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix.
Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.
NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for
more information.
IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files
location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included
in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.
What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Building project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to
complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used
with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.
Open a dataset
1 Click File menu Open.
2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.
4 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu Save As.
In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the
next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and
use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson.
6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file.
You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you
save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.
For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.
Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template
contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial
projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary.
11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open.
12 Click OK.
The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move
the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition.
Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the
relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional
characteristic.
The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or
roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.
6 | Chapter 1 Introduction
Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation.
Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date.
Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.
This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified
by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit
Building.
In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is
determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components.
Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other
cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.
Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements
are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building.
An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.
Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties),
identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some
or all properties, but the set of propertiestheir names and meaningis the same. For example, six-panel colonial
doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.
Families are either component families or system families:
Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the
set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.
System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or
creating as separate files.
Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.
You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For
example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls
with different compositions.
Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910
x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can
have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type
within the same family.
Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building
(model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).
8 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar
with the user interface.
By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level
1 floor plan view is the default open view.
TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.
TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR.
While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another
timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context
menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function
you are performing and what is currently selected.
The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.
There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar
represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn
the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to
resize and move each toolbar.
The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays
a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the
components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.
10 | Chapter 1 Introduction
The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are
10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by
selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.
11 Click OK.
Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components.
Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the
project construction documents
Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans
Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans
To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the
Design Bar.
12 | Chapter 1 Introduction
TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab
from the context menu.
You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and
groups of your current project:
Right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups.
The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category
(doors, walls, windows), and group name. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name.
You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or
group to the project or add a view to a sheet.
The browser is dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser
title bar to a new location.
13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.
In the bottom left corner of the window, notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you
should do next. In this case, it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point."
TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.
14 | Chapter 1 Introduction
In the Status Bar, notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West.
20 Press TAB, and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol, Elevations:
Elevation: Elevation 5.
When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view, you can use the Status Bar
and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component.
Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. Click the Help button, and the topic specific to the
dialog box opens. If there is no Help button displayed, press F1 to get help on that dialog box.
Windows: From any window, press F1 to get the topic associated with the window.
Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips, rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays.
TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings Options menu.
Shortcut keys
Wheel mouse
In the following steps, you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands.
2 Click File menu Open.
3 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
4 Double-click the Metricfolder.
5 Select m_Cohouse.rvt, and click Open.
The 3D isometric view displays:
NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command.
16 | Chapter 1 Introduction
9 Click Zoom To Fit, and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window.
10 Click in the drawing area, and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region.
The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.
11 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom; this is referred to as a
crossing selection.
12 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel, you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically.
Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within
the view.
NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view, Revit Building uses the largest snap increment that represents less
than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments, click Settings menu Snaps.
13 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view,
on the View toolbar, click
The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen.
In the Dynamic View dialog, click Zoom, and drag the cursor in the drawing area.
Without clicking in the dialog, press and hold CTRL, hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse
button on a wheel mouse), and drag the cursor.
Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. These are the drag controls.
17 Click and drag the left control, moving the cursor to the left horizontally, to lengthen the wall.
18 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.
Move an element
19 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan.
(Move).
Some commands, such as Move and Copy, require two clicks to complete the command. After selecting
the element to be moved, for example, click to specify the starting position, and click again to specify the
ending position. In this case, you want to move the table closer to the wall.
21 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table.
18 | Chapter 1 Introduction
23 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Select the plant, and drag it
on top of the table.
Undo commands
24 On the Standard toolbar, click the drop-down menu next to
All changes you make to a project are tracked. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands
by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. In this example, you decide
that you like the table better where it was placed originally.
25 On the Undo menu, select the second item in the list, Move.
Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. All commands are canceled up to and
including the selected command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations.
NOTE To quickly undo the previous action, on the Standard toolbar, click the Undo command, or press and
hold CTRL and enter Z.
End a command
26 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
Some commands, such as the Lines command, stay active or current until you choose another command
or end the current command.
27 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it.
Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines.
28 To end the command, use one of the following methods:
20 | Chapter 1 Introduction
21
In this tutorial, you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Autodesk Revit Building.
You create a retail building that contains 5 floors, a curtain wall, a central service core, and a sloped roof
over one corner of the building.
As you develop the building design, you learn how to use parametric design techniques. Parametric
design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. Dimensions and other positional
constraints define relationships between elements in the model. For example, a wall or a column can be
constrained to grid. If the grid moves, the wall or column will move with it.
When you constrain Revit Building elements to each other, it is good practice to test the constraints, or
flex the model by changing parameters. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial, you learn how
to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.
23
you complete the foundation, datasets are provided with the following exercises. You can continue to
work in your project, or you may use the provided datasets.
In views that display elevation markers, you design inside the elevation markers. Each marker corresponds
to an elevation view in the project: East, North, South, West. You can access these views by clicking the
elevation marker arrow, or by opening the view in the Project Browser.
The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views, reflected
ceiling plan views, and elevation views created in the project by the template. These views are customizable:
you can rename them, change their properties, duplicate, and delete them. You can also add views to your
project as you develop and document the building information model.
NOTE If you create a project without a template, only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are
created.
9 Under Floor Plans, verify that Level 1 displays as bold.
The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view, the view you see in the drawing
area. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen, the software title bar contains the name of the
software and Project 1- Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current.
10 Under Elevations (Building Elevation), double-click South.
Two level lines, created by the template, display in the south elevation. Level lines are finite horizontal
planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. You use levels to
position Revit Building elements in your building model. You can add, delete, and duplicate levels, as well
as change their names, heights, and other properties.
11 In the Project Browser, notice the Legends, Schedules\Quantities, Sheets (all), Families, and Groups branches
that display at the same level as Views (all).
As you design and document your building model, content and building model reports, such as schedules
and legends, will be accessible from the Project Browser.
You learn how the levels are locked, or constrained, to each other, so that when one level moves, the other levels move
and change with it. When you begin designing, you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls,
doors, and windows within the building model.
TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser, it is good practice to precede the
level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser.
4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views.
5 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans, notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views
are now named 00 Foundation.
6 Double-click the 00 Foundation elevation height, enter -1800 mm, and press ENTER.
7 Double-click the Level 2 text, enter 01 Entry Level, and press ENTER.
8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.
9 Double-click the 01 Entry Level elevation height, enter 0 mm, and press ENTER.
11 On the left side of the Project Browser, view the Design Bar.
The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default, not all the tabs are
visible. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab, which should display by default. If
it does not, place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar, right-click, and click Basics.
12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Level.
Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and setting. This is the Options
Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the
Design Bar.
14 Click Plan View Types, verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected, and click OK.
When you add the new level, a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created.
15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line, and then move it up.
As you move the cursor, a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor
position.
16 Move the cursor until the height reads 3750 mm, and click to specify the start point of the new level line,
3750 mm above 01Entry Level.
17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels,
click to specify the endpoint of the level line, and press ESC.
18 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 3, click Rename, and enter 02 Level.
19 Click OK.
20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view.
Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view.
21 In the Project Browser, verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.
Next, you add another level, using a different option.
24 Place your cursor on the 02 Level line, and move it slightly upward.
A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn, 3750 mm above the 02 Level line.
04 Level
05 Roof Garden
06 Roof
NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. If you create a level by copying it, the associated
floor and ceiling plan views are not be created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference.
31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.
Notice that by moving the top level, all the levels move. The lock icon that displays indicates that the
levels are vertically constrained. If you select a level and click its lock, the levels are no longer constrained,
and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before
you continue on to the next exercise.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Column Grid on page 30.
In the following exercise, you constrain the column heights to the roof level, so that if the roof elevation changes, the
column height changes as well. In a later exercise, you change the columns to round hollow steel columns.
Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line.
4 Draw the first vertical grid line:
In the lower left corner of the drawing area, specify a start point for the grid line.
Move the cursor up, until it is positioned under the top elevation marker, and specify the grid line
endpoint.
The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
On the Design Bar, click Modify, and double-click 1 inside the grid bubble.
Next, use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the
existing line.
6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line:
Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line, and then place the cursor on the grid line to display
the location of the second grid line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C, and click to place the line.
Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D, and click to place the line.
8 Press ESC, or on the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.
On the upper left side of the grid, specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A.
Move the cursor horizontally past the last vertical grid line, and specify the grid line endpoint.
The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.
10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1.
11 On the Design Bar, click Grid.
12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm, add horizontal grid lines to complete the
grid, as shown.
15 Starting with grid line A, select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.
16 When you select the last vertical grid line, click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the
dimension.
17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing.
The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed.
18 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.
At the bottom endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip up, until it is closer to
grid line 5, and press ESC.
At the left endpoint of the grid line, click and drag the blue circular grip to the right, until it is closer
to grid line A, and press ESC.
If necessary, adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them.
(Grid Intersection).
29 Press and hold CTRL, and select all of the column grid lines.
30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red), and on the Options Bar, click Finish.
Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line
intersections of the column grid.
31 Press ESC, or on the Design Bar, click Modify to end the command.
32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B, and unlock it.
33 Press and hold CTRL, select grid line A, click Activate Dimensions, and then select the dimension value
between grid lines A and B.
34 Enter 9000 mm, and press ENTER.
The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines.
36 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. If it is unlocked, lock it.
Next, create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view
the columns as if you were walking toward them.
Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid, and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid
line to place the camera.
Move the cursor next to grid bubble A, and click to place the target point of the camera.
The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
41 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns.
Adding Beams
In this exercise, you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01
Entry Level floor plan, and then copy them to the subsequent levels.
When you finish adding beams, you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.
A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. The
view is currently set to coarse, which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.
4 Click Medium.
5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
6 In the Type Selector, verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.
7 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
8 Press and hold CTRL, and select each grid line.
The selected grid lines display as red.
9 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building to view all of the beams.
Adding Beams | 37
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Top Level, select 06 Roof, and click OK.
24 Press ESC.
The columns now extend to the top level of the building, 06 Roof.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click To Building, and if necessary, resize the view to see
the entire structure.
Adding Beams | 39
Adding Braces
In this exercise, you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. To better add the braces to the structure,
you create 8 framing elevation views.
Adding Braces | 41
10 Move your cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level, and click to specify the endpoint
of the brace.
11 Using the same technique, add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as show below. After you
add the final brace, press ESC to end the command.
NOTE Do not copy or array braces. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between
elements.
Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity
12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height, enter 18000 mm, and press ENTER.
The height of the roof lowers.
IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level, delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the
endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.
Adding Braces | 43
13 Double-click the 04 Level height, enter 10000 mm, and press ENTER.
14 On the Standard toolbar, click
Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure
18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views, as shown in the 3D view below.
3 times to restore the locked dimension, grid size, and roof height.
Creating a Foundation
In this exercise, you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes
the building load to the ground.
Creating a Foundation | 45
Before you can add the pile caps, you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. You learn how to
access the families that are stored in libraries included with software, and how to load specific families into a project.
After you load the pile cap family, you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view, where you must adjust
the view range before you can view them.
In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, for View Range, click Edit.
In the View Range dialog, under View Depth, for Level, select Unlimited, and click OK twice.
14 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Changing Structural Member Types on page 48.
Creating a Foundation | 47
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_update_structure.rvt.
The brace type changes, although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.
36 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm.
View the building model with the new structural element types
37 On the View toolbar, click
Adding Floors
In this exercise, you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.
To create floors, you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. Some other Revit Building elements, such as roofs, stairs,
and railings are also created from sketches. In this exercise, you learn some different techniques that you can use when
sketching objects.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_floors.rvt.
The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important, as you resize it in the next steps.
3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge:
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line, and then the 1st horizontal grid line.
Move your cursor to the left, past the first vertical grid line, and click above the 1st horizontal grid
line to place the dimension.
Leave this dimension unlocked. If the grid changes size, the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it.
4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension.
Adding Floors | 51
5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimension.
At the top left corner of the grid, select the top floor line.
Move the cursor to the right dimension, and click the temporary dimension value.
Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm.
Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid, and change their values to 300 mm.
The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it, this is
how you would do it.
9 Because you do not need to modify the floor, on the Design Bar, click Quit Sketch.
Next, you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model, using a different sketching technique.
You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.
Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line, and move the cursor until the dashed green line
displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor.
IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines.
The 02 Level floor sketch displays.
12 At the top left corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown,
and lock the dimensions.
13 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 02 Level floor and the grid.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The 02 Level floor displays.
Adding Floors | 53
Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level
26 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor.
28 Click Edit menu Copy to Clipboard.
29 Click Edit menu Paste Aligned Select Levels by Name.
30 In the Select Levels dialog, select 05 Roof Garden, and click OK.
31 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 05 Roof Garden.
The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.
32 Select the floor, and on the Options Bar, click Edit.
33 At the top corner of the grid, dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.
Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the
grid.
34 At the bottom right corner of the grid, dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the
grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors.
35 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Adding Floors | 55
42 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} to view the grid.
44 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 00 Foundation, and lock the dimension that you
unlocked in a previous step.
45 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Roof on page 56.
Adding a Roof
In this exercise, you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building.
To create the roof, you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Building. You sketch the footprint, or the perimeter,
of the roof in a plan view, and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_roof.rvt.
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
5 On the Options Bar:
Click
6 Move the cursor over grid line E, and then move your cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. When a
green dashed line displays, click to place the roof line.
The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker.
7 Select grid line 5, move your cursor slightly below the grid line, and when the green dashed line displays,
click to place the roof line.
Adding a Roof | 57
9 Select grid line C to place another roof line, and lock it.
10 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line, and lock it.
11 Press ESC.
12 Trim the rooflines:
Select the portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E that you want to keep, and then
select the portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5 that you want to keep.
Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown.
13 Optionally, place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them.
14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, for Slope Angle, enter 4.00, and click OK.
Adding a Roof | 59
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt.
Click OK twice.
Click
9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint, and move it slightly toward the building interior.
10 When a green dashed line displays, click to place the 1st curtain wall segment.
11 Select the 3 remaining grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the
grid lines toward the building interior.
13 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, dimension 2 corners of the curtain wall to the grid, and lock the
dimensions.
If the grid moves, the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. These dimensions are not in a
sketch, so they remain in the view. If you want to hide them, you can delete the dimension, but opt to
keep the constraint, when prompted.
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building
entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
3 Click View menu Visibility/Graphics.
4 On the Model Categories tab, under the element list, click All.
All the elements in the list are selected.
5 Under Visibility, clear one element to clear all the elements.
6 Click in the Visibility/Graphics dialog, and then under Visibility, select Curtain Panels and Structural
Columns.
Do not select Columns, as these usually represent internal pilasters.
Creating an Entrance | 63
7 Click OK.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, open Metric\Families\Doors, and select
M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass.rfa.
Notice the preview that displays on the right side of the dialog when you select the curtain wall family.
Click Open.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, open Metric\Families\Curtain Wall Panels,
select M_Solid Panel.rfa, and click Open.
13 When all 9 panels are selected, click the pin to remove it from each of the panels.
14 With the panels selected, in the Type Selector, select System Panel: Solid.
15 Click View menu Apply View Template.
16 In the Select View Template dialog, select Architectural Elevation, and click OK.
17 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level Medium.
The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for, in this
case an architectural elevation. If you select View Visibility/Graphics, you see that the visibility of many
of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected.
Creating an Entrance | 65
24 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line, and click to select it.
Creating an Entrance | 67
36 Zoom in to the front of the building, and view the new entrance.
39 Press DELETE.
40 Using the same process, remove the mullions from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th panels.
41 Optionally, open the North elevation, and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same
steps that you used to create the south entrance.
42 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 69.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building.
Move your cursor horizontally below the bottom right column, and specify a point to complete the
callout.
8 Select the callout, select the grip closest to the callout symbol, and drag the grip down to position the
callout symbol below the grid as shown.
9 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level, and click Rename.
10 In the Rename View dialog, enter Display Area, and click OK.
11 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section.
12 Draw a section line.
Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker.
Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and specify a point past grid line D.
16 Select the section box, and drag the grips that display to limit the section view to display only 01 Entry
Level and 02 Level.
17 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
18 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section Display Area, and click OK.
19 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
21 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr).
22 On the Options Bar:
Click
Click
23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor, and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines
D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines.
24 On the Tools toolbar, click Align, and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom
horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. Lock both alignments.
25 Press ESC.
26 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
27 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall faces.
28 Dimension the space between the left vertical wall and the grid, and lock the dimension.
29 Dimension the space between the top horizontal wall and the grid, and lock the dimension.
30 In the Project Browser, under Ceiling Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Ceiling.
32 In the Type Selector, select Compound Ceiling:600 x 600 mm Grid.
33 On the Options Bar:
Click Sketch.
Click
Click
35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.
36 Press ESC.
37 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls.
38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section), double-click Section Display Area.
39 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style Wireframe.
40 Press and hold CTRL, select the four walls, and click
41 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Base Offset, enter 2700 mm, and click OK.
42 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
43 Select the ceiling, and click
44 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2700 mm, and
click OK.
Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling, press TAB until you select the wall chain, and click to
select the walls.
To start the tiles on a wall edge, select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line, and drag it to the
interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall.
To position the grid, on the Tools toolbar, click Move, select a grid line, and specify a distance.
52 Click OK.
53 In the Type Properties dialog, click Cancel.
54 In the Element Properties dialog, click Cancel.
57 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.
59 Press ESC.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_stair_.rvt.
When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection, click
to specify the start point of the reference plane.
Move the cursor vertically, and specify the reference plane endpoint on the top horizontal grid line.
Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from the vertical grid line on the opposite side.
Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an
equal number of risers created and risers remaining, and specify a point to create first stair flight.
Move the cursor horizontally to the left, and select the 2nd reference plane.
Move the cursor down, beyond the end of the stair, and specify a point.
The complete stair displays, with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain.
8 On the Options Bar, click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair, including its handrails.
Click
Select the interior face of the wall, and specify a point away from the wall.
Select the wall, select the dimension value, and enter 1200 mm.
23 Press and hold CTRL, select both reference planes, and press DELETE.
Click OK.
Click OK.
The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen.
35 Press SHIFT, press and hold the right mouse button, and move the cursor to spin the building model.
You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building, but if you view the top level
of the building, you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must cut an opening through
the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs.
Click
Click
Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.
58 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_wall_profile.rvt.
12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall, and then select the right face of the wall.
13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.
26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew, move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520
mm displays, and click to place it.
27 Press ESC.
30 Using the Quadrant snap, snap to the top of the circle, and select it.
31 Move your cursor to the left, and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line.
32 Press ESC.
33 Trim the profile lines:
Press ESC.
36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line, move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000
mm displays, and click to place it.
37 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the short horizontal line on the right, and press DELETE.
38 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
39 In the Error dialog, click Continue.
You need a closed sketch to complete the profile.
40 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch, and press DELETE.
46 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, note that for Top Constraint, Up to level: 06 Roof is
selected.
47 Click Cancel.
48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm.
52 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 90.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_host.rvt.
Click
30 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B.
31 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm from grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B, and click
to place the line.
32 Using the same technique, sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.
37 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line, move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm,
and click to finish the line.
38 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B, move the cursor up 900 mm, and click to
finish the line.
Next, create a new type for the sidewalk element, as it is currently a floor element.
48 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset from Level, enter -250 mm.
49 Click OK.
57 In the Type Selector, select M_RPC Female: Cathy, and click to place her on the sidewalk.
58 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex.
63 In the camera view (3D View 1), click the car, and click
64 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter -300 mm, and click OK.
65 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click West.
66 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing.
Next, you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. When you select a
host for a component, you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host.
67 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk.
68 Select Cathy, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
69 Click the sidewalk.
70 Select Alex, and on the Options Bar, click Pick Host.
71 Click the sidewalk.
72 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk.
If the sidewalk changes height, both Cathy and Alex will move with it.
73 Use the same technique to pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.
75 Proceed to the next exercise, Linking a Service Core to the Building Project on page 98.
The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. After the service core is linked to
your project, you must cut another shaft opening around it, so it will cut through the floors of the building.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_add_host_style_railings.rvt.
11 Click Open.
The building service core displays in your drawing.
12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D.
14 Select the top horizontal floor line, and then select the top horizontal core wall.
Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. You cannot constrain elements in the current project
to elements in linked models.
19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown:
Click OK.
, press SHIFT, and spin the building to get a better view of the core. You can see that the service core
cuts through the floors of the building.
25 Proceed to the final exercise, Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 102.
You copy the railing type into your project from another project, where it is hosted within a railing family.
Dataset
Continue to use the project file you used in the previous exercise, or follow the instructions below to open a new one.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon.
Open m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt.
15 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C, and click to split the floor.
22 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.
23 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched, move the cursor vertically 1500
mm, and click to draw another line.
24 Complete the sketch as shown.
26 Select grid line B, select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B, and click the lock to lock the alignment.
27 Select grid line D, select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D, and click the lock to lock the
alignment.
29 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown below, and lock the alignment.
30 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. Lock the dimensions.
Click
37 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.
A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.
Click Crop Region Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view.
109
Creating Drawings
In this tutorial, you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk
Revit Building 9.1 project. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building
model, begin by first creating sheets, which are a type of view in a project. Sheets are defined by borders,
usually contain a title block, and are accessible from the Project Browser. Depending on the type of
drawing that you want to create, you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet.
The model views that you can add to sheets include plan, section, elevation, three-dimensional views,
and schedules.
111
You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. You turn off the visibility of the furniture
in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. Next, you enter
the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. You then
add the floor plan view to the sheet, adjust the view scale, and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete
the floor plan drawing sheet. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet, and
observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), and expand Floor Plans.
2 Under Floor Plans, right-click Level 1, and click Duplicate.
A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser.
3 Right-click Copy of Level 1, and click Rename.
4 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Level 1 Furniture, and click OK.
5 In the Project Browser, double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan.
Turn off visibility for casework, furniture, and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view
6 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box, click the Model Categories tab.
8 Under Visibility, clear:
Casework
Furniture
Lighting Fixtures
Specialty Equipment
9 Click OK.
Casework, furniture, and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view.
The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. Casework, furniture, lighting fixtures, and specialty
equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan.
Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet
10 On the Settings menu, click Project Information.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit for Project Address.
12 In the Edit Text dialog box, enter the following address:
Anytown, MA 12345
13 Click OK.
15 Click OK.
Create a sheet
16 On View tab of the Design Bar, click Sheet.
TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar, right-click, and click View.
17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box, click Load.
18 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Titleblocks\
A0 metric.
A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.
The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields
in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters
with the appropriate text fields.
The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information
that you entered previously.
NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time
the project file is saved.
19 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all).
The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 - Unnamed.
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name,
and click OK.
23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in
the Project Browser.
26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet, and click to place the view in the center of the drawing
sheet.
The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet, but the scale of the view is too small for the
drawing sheet. View scale is a property of the view, and you can modify it within the sheet by activating
the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale.
27 With the view selected, on the View menu, click Activate View.
The border and title block are grayed out, indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can
modify it. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level
1 floor plan view.
28 Right-click the view, and click View Properties.
29 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select 1:20 for View Scale, and click OK.
The scale of the view on the sheet changes. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view, right-click,
and click View Properties, you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20.
Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale
30 On the View menu, click Deactivate View.
The border and the title block are no longer grayed out, indicating the view is deactivated.
31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector, click Viewport : Title w Line.
32 Select the viewport, and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it.
Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall, and then select the outer face of the east exterior
vertical wall.
Move the cursor above the north exterior wall, and click to place the dimension.
38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior
walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall, as shown in the following illustration.
When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated, the changes are made
within the building model and not restricted to the current view. This means that when you reoriented
the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan, the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. Dimensions,
however, are specific to the view in which they are created.
The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed, but the door reflects the
change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan.
44 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 119.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Drawing_Exercise.rvt.
5 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name,
and click OK.
Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.
In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), the new sheet, A102 - Furniture Plan Level 1, is displayed. The
sheet is incrementally named A102.
Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet
6 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 Furniture.
7 On the View Control Bar, click the scale value, and select 1:20.
11 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet on page 120.
3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the lamp next to the lounge chair.
4 In the Type Selector, verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed.
5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type.
9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior
horizontal wall, enter 5200 mm, and press ENTER.
The desk, chair, and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Drawing_Exercise.rvt.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dashed callout view border.
5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag, and move it to the position shown in the following
illustration.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view.
Change the callout view scale, and add the callout view to a new sheet
7 On the View Control Bar, click the scale value, and select 1:20.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the elevation symbol arrow, and zoom out to view the elevation
extents.
The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol.
21 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation
view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.
22 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Elevations, and notice that two new elevation views
display: Elevation 1 - a and Elevation 1 - c.
27 Add Elevation 1 - c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project
Browser onto the sheet.
28 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A102 - Furniture Plan Level 1.
29 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room.
The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.
34 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building:
Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the
section head (section tag).
Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section
tail and complete the section line.
35 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west.
Using Legends
Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two
most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component
legends.
Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that
identifies them. On construction documents, annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.
Building component legends list and identify components such as walls, windows, doors, and door frames. On
construction documents, building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule, door frame
schedule, and so on).
NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building
building model, and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
15 Working from the top down, enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend:
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Legends_in progress.rvt.
13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point.
14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.
15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB, and click Modify on the Design Bar.
17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component.
20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text, and enter Wall Type 1.
21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2.
22 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
23 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
24 Below the title text of the upper component, draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component
callout.
25 Using extension reference lines, add an identical detail line below the lower component.
The open drawings are both visible, allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then
apply the type in the second drawing.
4 In the Wall Type Legend view, select the wall type 1 component.
Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled, indicating that it captured the wall type properties.
5 In the floor plan view, enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.
6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan, so that you are zoomed in to the walls.
7 Click on the wall at the top of the view.
8 On the View Control Bar, select Medium for Detail Level.
Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.
The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend.
9 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.
10 Proceed to the next lesson, Using Revision Tracking on page 136.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
If Visible is not selected, any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in
the view in which you create it. In most instances, you would turn off visibility only after a revision was
issued.
7 Click OK.
8 On the File menu, click Save As.
9 Navigate to your preferred directory, name the file m_Revisions-in progress.rvt, and click Save.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, Sketching Revision Clouds on page 137.
Modify a window
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, and expand Floor Plans.
2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area.
3 In the small empty room, select the window.
4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window, enter 1200 mm, and press ENTER.
Add a window
5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area, and click
The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. You can change the appearance of the cloud
from the Settings menu.
15 On the File menu, click Save.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Tagging Revision Clouds on page 139.
The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. The number is based on the numbering method you
specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project, and because the
revision is the first in the project, the cloud is tagged as number 1.
10 On the File menu, click Save.
11 Proceed to the next exercise, Working with Revisions on page 140.
The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule.
After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet, you prevent
further changes to the revision. You do this by issuing the revision.
Issue a revision
8 On the Settings menu, click Revisions.
9 In the Revisions dialog box, enter a name for Issued to.
10 Select Issued, and click OK.
NOTE After you issue a revision, you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in
the drawing area, nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds.
A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.
13 Enter the appropriate information for this revision.
14 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing, for Visible, select None for each issued revision.
15 Click OK.
16 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.
Detailing
In this tutorial, you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1. You can detail directly in
a view of the building information model, using detail components to represent materials like lumber,
plywood, and metal studs. These components display at the required scale. For a detail that you do not
want to associate with the model, like a standard detail that you want to add to a library, you use a
separate drafting view in which to create the detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically
linked to the building model.
In this tutorial, you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings
in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail.
143
In order to detail from the building model, you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. You define
that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the callout view, you trace over the building model
geometry, add detail components, and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project.
2 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the section line.
Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line.
Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following
illustration.
Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays.
15 Click OK.
16 In the view, select the First Floor level line.
Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level.
Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall
1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command, turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs.
Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out.
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
3 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
4 On the Options Bar, select Chain and click
5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. Exact dimensions
are not important.
TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch.
11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, under Name and Pattern, select EARTH.
12 Click OK three times.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration.
18 In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Detail
Components\Division 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06110-Wood Framing.
19 Select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section.rfa.
20 At the bottom of the dialog box, select the following lumber components:
50X150 mm Nominal
50X250mm Nominal
50X300 Nominal
21 Click Open.
22 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section 50x250.
23 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise.
24 Place the lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.
TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber.
26 In the Type Selector, select M_Nominal Cut Lumber- Section: 50x150, and place it in the detail view.
Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. When you place the repeating detail component, this
parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the
space that you select evenly.
Select Inside.
39 Click OK twice.
40 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face:
Move the cursor up along the plywood component, until enough lap siding displays to cover it, and
click to place the lap siding.
NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along
the entire length of the plywood. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it, on the
Design Bar, click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. Select and move the blue grips
on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding.
8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references, sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard.
13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration.
17 In the Name dialog box, enter Plasterboard for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Type Properties dialog box, click
19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, under Name and Pattern, select Gypsum-Plaster.
20 Click OK three times.
21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board.
31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, under Name and Pattern, select Concrete.
32 Click OK three times.
33 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region.
Near the end of this lesson, you turn off the display of the model geometry. If there were no filled region
to represent the foundation walls, the region would be blank.
34 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation on page 157.
9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration.
Add insulation
10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Insulation.
11 On the Options Bar, enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center.
12 Sketch the insulation:
Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point.
Move your cursor down to the top of the 50x150 and click to specify the endpoint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the crop boundary of the detail view.
5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the break line.
and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following
NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration.
Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only
11 On the View menu, click View Properties.
12 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Do not display for Display model, and click OK.
When you turn the display model off, the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in
this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously, as shown in the
following illustration.
5 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts
through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project.
The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component.
The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing, behind the cabinet.
There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink, a cabinet, and a simple fill pattern. Select
the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar.
6 Proceed to the next exercise, Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View on page 163.
Select Override.
21 Click OK twice.
The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier.
22 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Drafting_views.rvt.
TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. You can also use the Rectangles
sketching tool to create the basic shapes, and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch.
Under Dimension Snaps, clear Length dimension snap increments, and click OK.
22 On the Design Bar, click Dimension, and dimension the door trim.
Sketch a door
26 On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines.
27 In the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown.
TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. Select the
desired dimensions, and on the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate command, and click Hide Object from
the context menu.
38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components and Keynoting on page 173.
Div 09-Finishes
09500-Ceilings
09150-Acoustical Ceilings
M_Suspension Tee-Section.rfa
M_Suspension Wire-Section.rfa
20 Click Open.
21 On the View Toolbar, click
22 Select each of the following components from the Type Selector and click in the drawing area to place each
component, as shown:
M_Suspension Wire-Section
27 In the Keynotes dialog, expand 09000 Division 09 - Finishes, expand 09500 Ceilings, expand 09510
Acoustical Ceilings, and select Key Value 09510.D1.
28 Click OK 3 times.
29 Using the steps that you just learned, assign a keynote to each of the other ceiling components:
Detail Component
Keynote
09510.A11
09510.B2
09510.C1
37 In the Element Properties dialog, under Dimensions, for Extend End Top, enter 150 mm, and click OK.
38 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
39 On the Options Bar, click Load.
40 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Detail
Components\Div 05-Metals\05300-Metal Deck\05310-Steel Deck.
41 Select M_Roof Decking-Section.rfa, and click Open.
42 In the Type Selector, select M_Roof Decking-Section : 1.5 NR 22.
43 Click in the drawing area to place the metal component.
to find the
46 Click the left endpoint of the section, and click the right endpoint to measure the section.
Notice that the roof decking section is 150 mm long.
Keynote
04220.A16
04210.A1
04220.C3
75 Add the following detail structural components to the drafting view and keynote the components:
Component Family and Type
Structural/Concrete/Reinf Bar Section.rfa (Type: Reinf Bar
Section : #_3)
Keynote
The Keynote for this component is under Div 03 -Concrete:
03210.A1 #3 Rebar
05090.D2
76 Add the following detail lumber components to the drafting view and keynote the components. These
lumber components are located in folder Div 06 - Wood and Plastic/06100 Rough Carpentry:
Component Family and Type
Keynote
06160.D12
81 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New, and in the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
82 In the Name dialog, enter CMU 200x200x400, and click OK.
83 Specify the following values in the Type Properties dialog:
84 Click OK twice.
85 Click in the drawing area to place the first endpoint, move the cursor vertically for a height of 600 mm,
and click to place the repeating detail component.
93 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New, and in the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate.
94 In the Name dialog, enter Stacked Modular Brick, and click OK.
95 Specify the following values in the Type Properties dialog:
97 In the drawing area, click at the bottom right corner of the M_Bond Beams-Single-Section component, and
click again just above the top right corner.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_shared_details.rvt.
(Move).
9 Click the upper left corner of the stacked brick component and move the cursor to the right, enter 50 mm
and press ENTER to move the component to the right, as shown:
10 Select the CMU detail, click the blue line end control and move the cursor down so that only three repeating
components display, as shown:
11 Place the next three detail components on top of the CMU detail in the following order:
12 Place the next two detail lumber components side-by-side on top of the existing detail:
NOTE Press the SPACEBAR when placing the lumber components to change the orientation to horizontal. Use
the Move command if necessary to place the detail components so the edges line up with the existing detail
components, as shown.
13 In the Type Selector, select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm, and place it on an angle with the left edge at the
upper left corner of the M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50x150mm and the right edge 25 mm above
the upper right corner of the M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50x200mm.
NOTE To place the right end of the plywood precisely, add a reference line 25 mm above the M_Nominal Cut
Lumber-Section : 50x200mm before placing the plywood detail.
In the drawing area, draw the border lines for the new wedge-shaped component.
Draw crossed lines through the new component from the bottom left corner to the top right and from
the bottom right to the top left.
16 Press and hold CTRL, and click to select each line in the new component.
17 In the View Control Bar, click Hide/Isolate Isolate Object.
In the left pane of the New dialog, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric Detail Component.rft
in the Metric\Templates folder.
Click Edit menu Paste from Clipboard to paste the new component into the template.
Click in the drawing area to place the component in the upper right quadrant of the template. If
necessary, use the Move command to position the lower left corner of the component at the intersection
of the reference lines.
19 Click File menu Save As to save the new component in the detail component library.
20 In the Save As dialog, navigate to Training Files\ Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and
Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06110-Wood Framing, for File name, enter Wood Cant, and click Save.
21 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects.
22 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_shared_details.rvt, and click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, under Drafting Views, double-click Roof Edge detail with Keynotes.
24 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component.
25 Verify that Wood Cant is selected in the Type Selector, and click to place the component in the detail.
Select the two crossed lines in the component, and in the Type selector, select Light Lines.
Select the border lines of the component, and in the Type Selector, select Medium Lines.
28 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component, and on the Options Bar, click Load.
29 Navigate to the 06110-Wood Framing folder in the Detail Components folder, select Wood Cant.rfa, and
click Open.
30 In the Reload Family dialog, click Yes to reload the component.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
In the Type Selector, select M_Anchor Bolts Hook-Side : M12, and place the component in the upper
left section of the existing detail, as shown:
Select the anchor bolt and click the blue shape handle to drag the top of the component down below
the plywood detail, as shown:
NOTE A repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Placing the single brick component on top of the stacked brick
allows you to keynote the brick component in the detail view.
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
45 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects, and in the Load into Projects dialog, select m_shared_details.rvt,
and click OK.
46 In the Reload Family dialog, click Yes to overwrite the existing version of the project.
47 Save the Bricks Section family as M_Bricks-Section-Modified.rfa, and close the file.
In the Type Selector, select M_K-Series Bar Joist-Side : 12K5, and place it in the center of the detail.
(Mirror).
Click on top of the joist where it intersects the wall, move the cursor to the left along the joist and
click just past the end of the joist.
52 On the Design Bar, click Detail Component, and drawing from left to right, place each of the following
components on top of the metal deck:
Draw a line offset along the top of the protection board and to the left of the side of the bond beam
and 50x150 mm lumber component.
On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines, on the Options Bar, click
Click to place a line above the sloped plywood, to the right of the 50x200 mm lumber, and to the left
of the 50x150 mm lumber.
NOTE If necessary, select the line to the left of the 50x150 mm lumber and resize it as shown:
On the Design Bar, click Detail Lines and add angled lines to complete the overhang on either side.
Select the top, left and right lines around the sloped component, and in the Type Selector, select
Medium Lines.
On the Design Bar, click Detail Component, and on the Options Bar, click Load.
In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon.
Click to insert a Break Line on the left and bottom right of the detail. Press the SPACEBAR before placing
the Break Line to change the rotation of component, as required.
NOTE On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the break line, and drag the shape handles to extend the
break line, if necessary.
57 Add ceiling, suspension tee, and suspension wire components to the detail as shown:
Select M_Suspended Acoustic Ceiling-Tegular Edge Section: 19x600x600, and click to place 1 component
in the detail with the right end resting in the Suspension Wall Angle. Click to place a second component
to the left of the first.
Select M_Suspension Tee-Section : 24mm, and click to place it between the two Suspended Acoustic
Ceiling components.
Select M_Suspension Wire Section, and click to place it above the Suspension Tee.
Select the wire in the drawing area, click the blue shape handles and drag the top of the wire to the
joist above and the bottom of the wire to the suspension tee below.
Select the break line, and drag the shape handle to extend the line to the bottom of the detail.
Drag the center of the break line to position it in the middle of the detail.
Drag the shape handle to extend the line to the top of the detail.
, and click
70 Zoom in on the top of the suspension wire, and on the Design Bar, click Filled Region.
71 Sketch a region over the area where the suspension wire overlaps the joist on the right.
Click and drag the left Break Line region to the left to expose the endpoint of the repeating roof decking.
In the Type Selector, select M_Roof Decking-Section : 1.5 NR 22, and click to place the element in the
drawing area.
Use the SPACEBAR to rotate the element as you place it.
Move the roof decking element so it is attached to the endpoint of the repeating roof decking on the
left.
Click the single roof decking detail element to place the end of the leader.
NOTE After you place the keynote on the single roof decking element, you can click and drag the leader to more
accurately keynote the repeating detail.
11 Add keynotes to the following detail components:
NOTE If you have trouble selecting a component in the drawing area, click an adjacent element, and in the
Options Bar, click
12 Select the 3 keynotes in the drawing area, and select each of the view options for keynote display in the
Type Selector:
3 Click OK.
19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown.
6 Select the callout, and use the callout grips to move the callout head.
The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view
is already placed on this sheet.
8 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name. Otherwise, close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Scheduling
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building 9.1
projects.
203
You begin by creating an instance schedule, or a schedule that lists every window in the building.
You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building
model.
Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to
a window type schedule, or a schedule that lists the windows by window type.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Count
Height
Level
Type Mark
Width
6 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.
7 Click OK.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
6 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
Name
Level
Area
7 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking
Move Up or Move Down.
13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29, and enter Conference to change the room name.
14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1, and select Conference from the list.
15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1, and enter 30.
18 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
TIP If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room and
Area.
19 On the Options Bar, select 29 Conference for Room, verify that Horizontal and Tag on placement are
selected.
20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the
room.
The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room. A crosshair graphic identifies the room
and the rectangular label contains the room tag.
23 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated
room rows.
28 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that
you added to the schedule.
Modify rooms
29 In the schedule, locate the room with an area of 91.72 square meters, and select Circulation for Name.
30 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click flr 3, and zoom in on the room.
The name in the room tag is now Circulation.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the seven rooms shown in the following
illustration.
NOTE To select a room, hover over the room until the crosshair graphic displays, and click to select the room.
To modify properties for a room, you must select the room rather than the room tag. If you have difficulty
selecting the room, zoom in on the region.
33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Office for Name, and click OK.
34 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the three remaining rooms named Room.
35 With the rooms selected, click
36 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Services for Name, and click OK.
45 On the Options Bar, click New twice to add two rows to the schedule.
46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration.
50 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Exec Offices for Room Style, and click
OK.
51 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the rooms in the three offices (37, 38, 39)
in the lower right corner of the floor plan.
52 On the Options Bar, click
53 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Exec Offices for Room Style, and click
OK.
60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services, select Services from the list in the Room Style
column.
61 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Room Color Diagram on page 217.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_schedules.rvt.
Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the color legend.
7 On the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme.
8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box, click the color button for Conference.
9 In the Color dialog box, click PANTONE, and click OK.
10 In the PANTONE Color Picker, scroll all the way to the left, and click the color green.
11 Click OK three times.
The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green.
15 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
16 Close the exercise file.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Define the rooms4 Beginning in the upper-left corner of the model and working clockwise, click in each enclosed room.
NOTE If the Room and Area tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room and Area.
8 Draw a line below the stair run to define the room.
The room object will expand to find the boundaries.
23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, clear Room Bounding, and then click OK.
24 In the Warning dialog, click Delete Room(s).
The definitions of the restrooms are updated; because the partitions are no longer bounding objects, the
stalls are included as part of the overall restroom area.
Drag the end of the leader line into the large area of the restroom.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Define rooms
13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry Level.
14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
15 On the Options Bar, for Room, select 1 Men, and verify that Tag on placement is selected.
16 Click to place the room and room tag in the left bathroom.
21 Drag the cursor to the right and click where the right wall intersects the stairs.
31 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, clear Room Bounding, and then click OK.
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The definitions of the restrooms are updated; because the partitions are no longer bounding objects, the
stalls are included as part of the overall restroom area.
Add columns
37 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Column.
38 In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to load a Columns family.
39 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Columns\
M_Rectangular Column.rfa.
40 In the drawing area, click to place a column in the upper-right corner of the shaft.
41 Click to place another column in the lower right corner of the shaft.
42 Press ESC twice.
Because the columns are room bounding, the room area is recalculated.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
6 Click OK.
The Wall Schedule displays. Notice that the wall areas are not totaled.
7 Double-click the column separator to maximize the column to the width of the text.
15 Zoom in on the schedule, and use the blue controls to adjust column widths.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Although the schedule reports data for all walls in the building, the interior partition wall has multiple
components which are not shown. You create a material takeoff to quantify the components.
22 Click OK.
The Wall Material Takeoff Schedule displays.
23 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.
29 Use the steps you learned to place the Wall Material Takeoff schedule on the sheet to the left of the wall
schedule, and adjust the column widths.
The takeoff schedule shows the area for all of the wall components (metal stud and plasterboard) in the
interior partition wall.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files, graphics are displayed with imperial values. To display graphics with
metric values, select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric.
Area
Volume
Width
Length
7 Right-click Wall Schedule, and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that
you created.
8 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, click Edit for Fields.
9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box, add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule.
10 Click OK twice.
The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule.
Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule
11 In the wall schedule, click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule, and click
12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box, expand C - Interiors, expand C10 - Interior Construction, expand
C1010 - Partitions, expand C1010100 - Fixed Partitions, and select C1010115 - Partitions - Brick Veneer w/
Stud.
Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model
15 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
16 Select one of the Interior - 5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls.
36 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right
border of the schedule.
The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top
aligned.
37 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule
segments as shown.
38 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
39 Close the exercise file.
across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category
schedules.
An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling
and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for
this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters, adding the shared parameters to a family, and
creating a multi-category schedule.
You create shared parameters, add them to a door family, create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor
plan, and then generate the multi-category schedule.
21 Click OK.
22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location, so that you can use it later in this exercise.
23 On the File menu, click Close to close the file.
42 On the File menu, click Load from Library Load Family, and load into the project the multi-category tag
files HardwareTag.rfa and NewDoor.rfa that you just created.
43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just
loaded.
44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag Multi-Category.
45 In the Type Selector, select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded.
46 Move your cursor into the drawing window.
Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to
ID.
47 Click to place the tag.
Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the
Door family.
48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the
filter parameter.
49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box, select Multi-Category Tags for Category, and click OK.
ID
Mark
Type
Family
Closure
Lock Set
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
If you created a standard door schedule, all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. However, you
want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box, click the Fields tab.
6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Count
Sill Height
Head Height
Width
Level
7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with, and it causes the schedule
to include only the doors on Level 3.
8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row.
Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not
included as a column in the schedule
9 Click the Formatting tab.
10 Under Fields, select Level.
11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden Field, and click OK.
The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula on page 241.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box, click the Fields tab.
5 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
Count
Cost
Area
14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types, enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. The
wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. Use the cost values in the following
illustration.
Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square
meter
15 Right-click the schedule, and click View Properties.
16 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, click Edit for Fields.
17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box, click Calculated Value.
18 In the Calculated Value dialog box, do the following:
NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless; without the value it would
have a unit of area.
19 Click OK.
20 Click the Formatting tab.
21 Under Fields, select Total Cost.
22 Under Field formatting, select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned.
23 Click Field Format.
24 In the Format dialog box, specify the following:
25 Click OK.
26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box, click the Sorting/Grouping tab.
27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals
on the Formatting tab, and click OK twice.
The schedule is displayed.
Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. m column. This is because you did not select
to calculate the totals for that field.
28 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
29 Close the exercise file.
You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant
parameter as a column in the schedule. After you create the schedule, you can add information to the Occupant column
in the schedule, either by entering it directly, or by entering it in the properties of the room tag.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Under Categories, select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category.
4 Click OK.
The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box.
5 Click OK.
Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule
6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room.
TIP If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Room and
Area.
7 Place the rooms as shown in the following illustration.
Number
Area
Department
Occupant
13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the
room properties.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element
instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). Additionally, tables
that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.
A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements, so that each table of elements includes an Id
column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. For
example, instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instances type, and some
instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.
In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category, a table is also created for each key schedule
in a project, as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. The exported
columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule, in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule
gives elements in its category a new parameter, used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.
These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element.
One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly
Code. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The table of types includes
an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table.
13 Close the exercise file.
In this tutorial, you learn how to change the base elevation of a project, and how to annotate and
dimension your Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 projects.
247
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
16 Using the same method, define the roof level as shared, so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm.
17 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. In Revit Building,
there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you
create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to
create families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility
to view them.
Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your
drawings. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned, linear, multi-segmented, radial, and
angular dimensions.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar, move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor
plan.
3 When the centerline of the wall highlights, select it.
Dimensioning | 251
4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view, and when the centerline of the wall highlights,
select it.
5 Move the cursor to the left, outside of the wall, and click to place the dimension.
The dimension displays in the drawing. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it, indicating that
the dimension can be modified.
Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall, and click to set the location of the dimension.
An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. In addition, an equal symbol with a
slash through it is displayed, indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length.
9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal.
The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol, indicating that the segments are now equal, and
the dimensions are permanent and constrained to each other.
Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall, and click to place the dimension.
13 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the curved wall.
The dimension is snapped to the wall center, the default dimension option.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the dimension line of the radial dimension, and press DELETE.
15 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
16 On the Options Bar, click
Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights.
Select the inside face of the wall, and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration.
You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan.
20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan:
Select the inside face of the slanted wall, and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it.
Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc, as shown in the following illustration, and click
to place the dimension.
Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. The linear dimension
tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. The dimension is always
constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis, and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. You can
override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar.
22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan:
Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall, and then select the bottom point of the exterior
face.
Move your cursor to the right, and click to place the dimension.
7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall, press TAB until the outside face of the wall highlights,
and select it.
8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face.
9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration.
14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall, but do not select it.
15 Right-click the control box, and click Delete Witness Line.
The witness line is deleted.
16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines.
IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. If you right-click
the control box, a shortcut menu with different options is displayed.
17 Select the outside face of the top wall.
The full dimension string is displayed again.
18 To end the editing command, click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Dimension Properties on page 261.
5 Click OK twice.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration.
7 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name, or close the exercise file without saving your changes.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 262.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
The cursor displays two arrows at its tip, indicating that the Align command is active.
2 Align the walls:
Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left.
The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. When you align two
components, the first component that you select remains fixed in position, while the second component
moves to complete the alignment. The lock symbol displays as unlocked, indicating the two walls are not
constrained to each other.
3 Click the lock.
The symbol changes to a closed lock, indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked.
Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned
4 On the Tools toolbar, click
5 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment, and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.
6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align.
13 Click the right wall, and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.
Move the walls to verify the alignment.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 268.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Alignment.rvt.
1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows.
You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string.
Click
Click Options.
4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box, select Openings, and then Widths.
These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case, the windows), and that
the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.
5 Click OK.
6 Select the lower horizontal wall.
The two vertical walls highlight, indicating the start and end of the dimension string.
7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension.
8 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Annotating
In this lesson, you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. You learn how to:
Annotating | 269
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing
the dimensions as shown in the following illustration.
5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows.
6 Proceed to the next exercise, Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms on page 271.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the room tag.
The room tag number displays in blue, indicating that it can be edited.
6 Zoom in on the tag number, click it, enter 101, and press ENTER.
7 Place another room and tag:
Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged.
Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the
one that displays at the tip of the cursor.
The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. Sequential letters are also supported.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Tagging Doors and Windows on page 273.
17 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name, or close the exercise file without saving your changes.
275
Viewing
In this tutorial, you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how
to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and
annotation within views.
More specifically, you learn how to change the visibility of detail components, how to control fill pattern
colors, and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.
277
You create elevations, sections, and three-dimensional (3D) views, and learn how to control the visibility of building
components and annotation within them.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, scroll down and click the Training Files icon.
TIP If the Project Browser does not display, on the Standard toolbar, click
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click East.
A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. Both hidden lines
and window tags display in the east elevation view.
The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The default name of the view is {3D}.
10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand
12 Press and hold CTRL, and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass
Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Perspective View with a Camera on page 281.
Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing, outside of the dimension lines.
Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building, as shown in the following illustration.
After you specify the second point (the view target), the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default
in a perspective view.
4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model, select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region
and move them out.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom All To Fit.
Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor up, down, and sideways to see how the view changes.
Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.
Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.
Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with
the other controls.
17 In My 3D View, select the camera target point (the magenta grip), and move it to another location.
3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.
18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties:
In the Element Properties dialog box, under Camera, enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for
Target Elevation.
Click OK.
20 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading.
25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model, as shown in the following
illustration.
26 Click and hold the rotation tool, and rotate the section box around the model.
3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model, and then click to the right of the lower right wall
to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.
Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. The box represents the extents
of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section.
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the
fill pattern.
6 Select the section view, right-click, and click Find Referring Views.
7 In the Go To View dialog box, select Floor Plan: Level 1, and click Open View.
8 Select the section line, and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the
following illustration.
4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby, place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby
entrance, and click.
Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.
11 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In addition, you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. This means that in views with a coarse
level of detail, such as the one below, you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type, in this case, a shade of gray.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, scroll down and click the Training Files icon.
Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Section Head - Filled), and double-click
Wall/Floor Join - Level 3.
Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. Each layer is
designated by the material settings of the layer.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type on page 293.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
In this exercise, you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. You change the coarse scale fill pattern
from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are
displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Showroom.rvt.
Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 293
7 In the Color dialog box, select a shade of gray, and click OK.
8 In the Type Properties dialog box, click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click
9 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Solid fill for Name, and click OK three times.
10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
coincident edges. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files, and you cannot control their visibility,
line type, line color, or pattern.
If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building, refer to the online Help for more information.
Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan
view, it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan.
By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height, you can display the stepped portion of the walls
in the Level 1 floor plan.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, scroll down and click the Training Files icon.
Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left.
Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right.
The plan region is no longer visible, as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view.
4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region.
As the cursor moves across it, the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle.
The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan
region.
11 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
In this tutorial, you learn to use the AccuRender Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit
Building 9.1 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model; to place
and render decals to create signs, billboards, and posters; and to create walkthroughs of your building
information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to
produce rendered views.
299
You learn to create and apply materials to a building model, add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site,
and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you select a scene that
defines the model environment, and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.
change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building.
change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt.
define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall.
When you complete these changes, you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the floor, and
the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
4 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that Co-house - Cavity Wall - Heavyweight block is displayed
for Type, and click Edit/New.
5 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. Verify that the material
defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry - Brick.
6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to
the exterior finish at this time.
A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the
Material Library.
10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box, under _accurender, expand Masonry and click Brick.
11 Under Name, select Carib,200mm,Running.
12 Click OK twice.
You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step.
Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.
14 On the Options Bar, verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector, and click
Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions
20 On the Settings menu, click Materials.
21 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, click Duplicate.
22 In the New Material dialog box, enter Aluminum, Polished and click OK.
23 Under AccuRender, click
24 In the Material Library, under _accurender, expand Metals, and click Aluminum.
25 Under Name, select Polished,Plain.
26 Click OK twice.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building.
TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection, press TAB to cycle your selection through
different building model components. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status
Bar at the bottom of the screen, select the curtain wall mullion again.
Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made
34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.
35 Move the cursor over the building model, and draw the rectangular region shown in the following
illustration.
Make sure the region includes the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions to which you made
material changes.
36 In the Scene Selection dialog box, verify that New is selected, select Exterior under Type, and click OK.
37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied
to the exterior walls, floor, and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments), producing
a photorealistic effect.
38 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building
model in hidden line wireframe.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 304.
In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the
season and location specified in the render scene settings.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.
3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component.
TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site.
4 In the Type Selector, select M_Tree - Deciduous : Acer Rubrum - 9 Meters.
Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. The tree that you selected in this
step is a red maple.
5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site, and click to place a tree.
Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the
following illustration.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.
Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.
3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.
Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view
4 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective
view name), and click Show Camera.
5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Flr. Cnst.
The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. view. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of
vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.
6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in
the following illustration.
7 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click 3D View 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Exterior, and click OK.
9 Proceed to the next exercise, Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View on page 309.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view.
28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene, click No.
The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.
30 On the Design Bar, click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of
the building model.
To create the rendered scene, you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor, define
the view and render scene settings, and finally, use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.
Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render
1 In the Project Browser under Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 314.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse.rvt.
Add a camera
1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Camera.
2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point:
Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.
Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.
The interior perspective is displayed, but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display
more of the view.
3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans, double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.
4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the
following illustration.
5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.
9 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Interior, and click OK.
11 On the View menu, click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it.
12 On the View menu, click View Properties.
13 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK.
A section box is displayed around the building model.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the section box.
Grips are displayed on the section box.
15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you
want to render is visible.
This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your
interior view. By limiting the geometry, you reduce the rendering time.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a New Render Scene on page 318.
The radiosity process, which can take several minutes, begins. Light bounce is calculated for each individual
light. When radiate completes, the following rendered view is displayed. The RPC people do not display
in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.
The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file.
By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial, you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You
learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine.
Recording a Walkthrough
After you create a walkthrough, you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with
any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI,
you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough:
Wireframe
AccuRender (Raytrace)
IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option, you must select or define a scene.
Creating a Walkthrough
In this exercise, you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.
You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse, proceeds through the dining room, and
ends in the far corner of the living room.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values, click Settings Project
Units, and change unit formats as desired.
6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room, on the Options Bar, click
.
The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed, surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the
following illustration. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the
walkthrough path is not precisely the same.
8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips.
If it is not, select the crop boundary.
Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.
9 On the Options Bar, click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.
10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box, enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.
11 Under Change, verify Field of view is selected, and click OK.
12 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom Out (2x), and select the crop boundary.
15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box, enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough
from 300 to 60, and click OK.
16 On the Options Bar, enter 1 for Frame, and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning
(the key frame).
17 Click
The walkthrough plays. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.
NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time, press ESC.
18 When the walkthrough stops playing, proceed to the next exercise, Changing the Walkthrough Path and
Camera Position on page 324.
3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Extents, clear Far Clip Active, and click OK.
Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.
The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.
5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip), and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the
following illustration.
Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera
displays at a slightly different location.
7 Click the third key frame position, and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration.
7 Try creating other walkthroughs, specifying the number of frames, reducing the size of the image, perhaps
to 6 wide x 4 height, and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. If you had 150 frames and
a frame rate of 15 seconds, then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10
seconds. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and
smooth movement.
8 If you want to save this exercise, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable
designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding
buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building
during specific times of the day and year.
In this tutorial, you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar
studies that you define. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one
solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.
More specifically, you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support
passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different
times throughout the year.
329
A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.
A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building.
A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, scroll down and click the Training Files icon.
A 3D view is created. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because
of minor variations in camera placement.
5 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view, as
shown.
Create section
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house, as shown.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, right-click Section 1, and click Rename.
8 In the Rename View dialog, enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway, and click OK.
.
to reorient the view.
12 In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right, as
shown.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 01 Entry.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site, including the
house, as shown.
The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. You can create a still, single-day, or multi-day solar study.
5 Click the Single-Day tab.
For the Single-Day solar study, you specify the location, date, and time range, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.
6 Click the Multi-Day tab.
For the Multi-Day solar study, you specify the location, date range, and time, as well as a time interval for
the frames of the solar animation.
7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Click the Single-Day tab.
8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA is selected, and click Duplicate.
9 In the Name dialog, enter Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and click OK.
10 Under Place, click
Changing the place in this dialog, changes the setting defined for the project.
12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog:
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Preview Solar Study.
7 On the Options Bar, under Frame, you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation:
8 On the Options Bar, click the control buttons to preview the animation:
.
.
.
NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar.
11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
13 On the Options Bar, click
The solar study animation plays, showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date
specified.
Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area, approximately as shown.
4 Sketch rooms:
Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area, as shown.
Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area, as shown.
NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the
living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor
plan helps to determine the best layout.
5 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, verify that Cast Shadows is selected.
8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click
9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Crop Region Show Crop Region.
12 In the drawing area, click the crop boundaries to select the crop region.
13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the building to reveal the roof overhang, as shown.
NOTE Enter ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.
14 Click outside of the crop region, and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area, if necessary.
15 On the View Control Bar, click Crop Region Hide Crop Region.
Export as AVI
16 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop.
For File name, enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Display mode, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
To maintain the proportions of the frame, you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated
automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.
NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. Limiting
the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames.
18 In the Save As dialog, click Save.
19 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.
NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. The AVI can then typically be played from
within the zip file.
20 On the File menu, click Save.
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Exporting a Study as PNG on page 341.
Export as PNG
1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed.
2 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Advanced Model Graphics.
3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Single-Day tab, select Winter Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
6 Click File menu Export Animated Solar Study.
7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:
For File name, enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway - Los Angeles.
For Frames per second, verify that the value is set to 15.
Under Format, for Display mode, verify that Hidden Line is selected.
For Dimensions, enter 450 in the first field (width), and click in the second field (height) to see the
value dynamically changed.
NOTE When you export to PNG, or any single-frame format, such as JPEG, TIFF, BMP, or GIF, it is recommended
that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files, depending on the Frame
Range. In this example, the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop.
8 In the Save As dialog, click Save.
The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. The resulting PNG images are date and time
stamped, as shown:
NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.
3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts, as shown.
5 Select the roof, and on the View Control Bar, click Hide/Isolate Hide Category.
Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.
9 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Multi-Day tab.
10 Select Multi Day Solar Study - Boston, MA, USA, and click Duplicate.
11 In the Name dialog, for File name enter 2pm - Los Angeles - Week Interval, and click OK.
12 Specify values for the multi-day study:
Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain, and click OK.
In the Save As dialog, for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway.
15 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, select Full Frames (Uncompressed), and click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
16 On the View Control Bar, click Shadows Solar Study Off.
17 On the File menu, click Save.
5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply.
Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view.
8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, on the Still tab, select Summer Solstice.
9 Under Date and Time, specify 11:00 AM for time, and click OK.
NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting, so you may need to make your own adjustment for
specific studies. For example, to see the sun at its highest point on June 22, you would set the time to 1:00 PM
rather than 12:00 PM.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply.
11 Under Sun and Shadows Settings, click
12 Under Date and Time, change the time back to 12:00 PM, and click OK.
16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Winter Solstice, and click OK.
17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click OK.
In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select True North, and click OK.
On the Options Bar, in the Angle from Project to True North field, enter 45 and press Enter to set the
angle of rotation.
NOTE Settings for the location and orientation, including the angle from True North, are saved with the project.
20 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
21 Click View menu Refresh.
Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.
24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Still tab, and select Summer Solstice, and click OK.
25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply.
27 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog, click the Single-Day tab, click Summer Solstice, Los Angeles, and
click OK.
28 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog, click Apply, and click OK.
In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.
Under Format, for Dimensions, enter 600 in the first field, and click in the second dimension field to
see the value calculated automatically.
30 In the Video Compression dialog, for Compressor, verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected, and
click OK.
The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.
31 Once you are finished with the study, it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project
North for documentation and annotation purposes:
In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Orientation, select Project North, and click OK.
NOTE Retain the 45 value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for
this project.
32 On the File menu, click Save.
Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating
Walkthroughs on page 299 for additional information on rendering.
In this exercise, you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering, capturing
it, and exporting it as a JPEG image.
Dataset
Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.
1 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.
2 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click each of the following views to review the available
views for rendering:
to house from SW
living area
This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room.
On the Options Bar, for Scene, select Winter solstice 2pm in LA.
The scene is rendered in high resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows
and how the shadows fall on the floor.
In the Save As dialog, for Save as Type, enter JPEG, and click Save.
7 Review some captured images of the building. In the Project Browser, under Renderings, double-click each
of the following images:
Presentation Views
10
In this tutorial, you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your
audience by creating presentation views.
The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. Whether the
audience is the general contractor, a consultant, an outside reviewer, or the client, tailoring the
presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit
Building 9.1 are intended to describe number, length, type, and other quantifiable elements within the
context of contract documents. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific
dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. To express texture beyond
material specifics, and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building"
and to recognize the "architecture."
In Revit Building, there are several options for expressing the architecture. They include the Accurender
Plug-in for Rendering, Advanced Model Graphics, the Linework Tool, and Section Boxes. There are two
directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. In this series of
exercises, you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach, tutorials on the Accurender
features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page
299.
In this tutorial, you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an
"analytique." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for
analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans, sections, elevations, and details. You can
use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space
by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building
model, Co-house, you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.
351
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Presentation Second Floor Plan, and click OK.
Modify visibility/graphics
4 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box, click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show
annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all tags, dimensions, sections, elevations, and so on in this view.
6 Click the Model Categories tab.
7 Under Visibility, expand the Stairs category, and clear DOWN Text, Down Arrow, UP Text, Up Arrow.
NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation.
8 Click OK.
Notice that no annotations display in this view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view.
3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box, specify the following:
The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering.
4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box, under Settings, select By Date, Time and Place.
5 Under Settings, click
for Place.
Within a Project, you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. At that place, you
can create, modify, and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype.
6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, click the Place tab.
7 Select Boston, MA, USA for City, and click OK.
NOTE For this step, you can enter any city you wish; however, be aware that if you enter a different city, most
of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings
that you choose.
8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box, specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time.
Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This gives the plan depth and creates a
sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view.
14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box, under Settings, clear Ground Plane at Level, and click OK.
This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.
15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box, click OK.
Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique, you need to create a new viewport type that
does not display the view title.
For this analytique, you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this, you
will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view.
19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. The space between the perimeter of the building model and
each line should be equidistant.
Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region, you must define the inner perimeter
by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model.
20 On the Options Bar, click
21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model, draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of
the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes.
TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details, and you should
take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. If necessary, use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or
overlapping intersections.
TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines, create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide
lines. When you are finished drawing the chain, select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back
to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector.
22 On the Design Bar, click Region Properties.
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New.
24 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
25 In the Name dialog box, enter Solid Black, and click OK.
26 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Graphics, click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays
within it.
27 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, under Name, scroll down, select Solid Fill, and click OK.
28 In the Type Properties dialog box, verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black, and click
OK.
29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
2 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, right-click Copy of South, and click Rename.
3 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Presentation South Elevation, and click OK.
This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.
6 Under Visibility, scroll up, expand the Doors category, and clear Elevation Swing.
7 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
8 Click OK.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation
floor plan.
7 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
To fit correctly in the analytique, this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. To accomplish this, you will
create a callout around the building model components within the section view.
Casework
Ceilings
Furniture
Lighting Fixtures
Specialty Equipment
18 Click the Annotation Categories tab, and clear Show annotation categories in this view.
This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.
19 Click OK.
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Extents, clear Crop Region Visible, and click OK.
Notice the crop region no longer displays.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Click Apply.
Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast.
TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view.
In the steps that follow, you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation
view with more contrast.
TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of
the section line in the previous exercise.
TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges.
10 On the File menu, click Save.
11 Proceed with the next exercise, Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 370.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. In the steps that follow, you accomplish this by rotating
the callout within the section view.
To rotate an object, you click to specify the start radius, move the cursor in the direction of the rotation,
and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.
10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. Using a clock as a reference, specify 3 oclock as the
rotation start point.
11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise, and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of
rotation, and press ENTER.
After you enter the rotation value and press Enter, the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice the extents need
to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.
12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as
shown.
14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport, and drag it up and to the left as shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
17 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation
on Sheet, and click OK.
18 Right-click the viewport, and click Deactivate View.
19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Create callout
1 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Type 1), double-click Section 1.
2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Callout.
3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.
After you add the callout, click Modify, select the callout, and modify the extents and the callout head
location as shown.
4 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), right-click Callout of Section 1, and click Rename.
5 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Presentation Callout, and click OK.
6 In the Project Browser, under Sections (Callout 1), double-click Presentation Callout.
7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown.
This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.
NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet, activate the viewport, turn on the crop
region from the view properties dialog box, and make adjustments as necessary. When finished, hide the crop
region and deactivate the viewport.
The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow, you add a heavy base to
the floors and a poche to the base. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas
of contrast, the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
Select Directly.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
11 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. You can use this to rotate the section box.
21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box, and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway
through the second floor as shown.
When you are finished, click Modify on the Design Bar.
Before turning off the visibility of the section box, make a copy of the view.
22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Isometric 2, and click Duplicate.
23 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, right-click Copy of Isometric 2, and click Rename.
24 In the Rename View dialog box, enter Isometric 3, and click OK.
25 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Isometric 2.
26 On the View menu, click View Properties.
27 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Extents, select Crop Region, clear Crop Region Visible, and
click OK.
Notice the section box no longer displays.
NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box, the stairs and railings may display.
In such a case, either adjust the plane location, or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the
Visibility/Graphics dialog box.
31 On the View menu, click View Properties.
32 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Extents, select Crop Region, clear Crop Region Visible, and
click OK.
Next, you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the
continual erosion of the structure.
35 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
36 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and, in the
Type Selector, select Viewport: Presentation.
Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.
4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it.
7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box, select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name, and click
OK.
8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box, under Silhouette Edges, select Override Silhouettes.
9 Under Silhouette Edges, select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style, and click OK.
13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the
following image. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.
397
11
The ability to import SketchUp files directly into Revit Building, allows you to quickly integrate sketch
concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework
it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components.
In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Building project as an in-place mass family.
After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use
the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that
compose the building.
399
You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or
you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.
Click Open.
18 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 401.
After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.
A roof is created from the mass face. It is hard to see the roof in the current view, but if you were to select
it, the roof type will display in the Type Selector, and its grips will display as shown.
7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected.
This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.
8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.
In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the
middle mass.
17 Click
to turn off the mass visibility in the view, and display only the roofs that
, and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form.
This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.
22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.
24 Click
29 Using the same technique, create the 2 curtain systems shown below.
, and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms.
39 Click
Below the right corner of the view, specify a point to place the camera.
In the far left corner of the building that you created, specify a point for the camera target, as shown.
The perspective view created by the camera displays. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips
display.
43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building, and click in the drawing area to
hide the grips.
to view only the walls, roofs, and curtain systems that make up your building
You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips.
Click OK.
48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.
50 Select each roof to display its grips, and move the roof edges as shown below.
, and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building.
Creating Families
413
12
All elements in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 are family based. The term family describes a powerful
concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Each
family element can have multiple types defined within it, each with a different size, shape, material set,
or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family
can look completely different, they are still related and come from a single source, thus the term family.
Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every
instance of that family or type within the project. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the
time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.
In this tutorial, you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor.
415
Introduction to Families
Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. All different types that
you create are stored with the master family file. For example, if you create a family called "double-hung window" that
includes types with several sizes, the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.
This makes file management much easier, because there is only one file to track. There are, however, exceptions to this
rule. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project
environment. Walls, floors, and roofs are examples of these types of families. In addition, there is another type of family
that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a
particular component type, such as a dome roof.
Revit Building has three types of families:
System
Standard Component
In-place
System Families
System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls, floors,
and roofs. The basic walls system family, for example, has wall types that define interior, exterior, foundation, generic,
and partition wall styles. You can duplicate and modify existing system families, but you cannot create new system
families.
NOTE You can use Transfer Project Standards to copy system families from one project to another.
The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family.
The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall, and also a standalone
furniture family component.
In-place Families
In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only
within the current project, so they are useful for objects unique to that project; for example, custom wall treatments.
You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families, and the category that you use determines the
components appearance and display control within the project.
The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family.
In this exercise, you learn when to use the Family Editor, how to access it, and the general procedure for creating a
standard component family.
13
In this tutorial, you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 families. In each lesson, you
learn how to create a different type of component. Using the installed templates, you start with a simple
door family and then move onto a window family. You create a furniture family, a lighting fixture, and
several annotation families. In addition, you create an in-place family. When you create an in-place
family, you create it within the project file, not within the Family Editor. This allows you to create the
family in the context of the current project.
419
You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width,
height, and thickness.
11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening, sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm
rectangle for the door leaf as shown.
14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.
NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions
are parameters, a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change
accordingly.
18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.
19 On the Options Bar, select Thickness for Label.
TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar, click the down arrow
button, and select the command from the menu.
When drawing an arc from center and end points, you first specify the arc center, then you specify each
end point.
24 Enter SI, and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point.
25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point.
26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint.
In the image below, the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.
7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle.
21 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Panel for Subcategory, and click OK.
The solid geometry of the door is now complete.
22 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Materials to the Door Components on page 428.
for Texture.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click
11 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Oak Door, and click OK.
12 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.
13 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
for Material.
17 In the Materials dialog box, select Oak Door for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.
for Material.
The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.
Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. By flexing the new component, you
ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project.
24 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. This allows you
to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts.
25 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
27 Click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, Defining New Door Types on page 430
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
11 Click OK.
You now have three new door types defined within your door family.
12 On the File menu, click Save.
13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name, Training Door.rfa.
24 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
Click Apply.
Change the height and width values again, and click Apply. Notice how the window opening adapts to
the changing dimension values. This process is called flexing the model, and it is done to avoid conflicts
and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.
11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width, and click Apply.
This is the starting point for the new window.
12 Click OK.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry on page 435.
5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending
at the lower right corner. Snap the cursor to each corner.
The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane.
11 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
12 On the Options Bar, click
13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as
shown.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the reference plane.
20 On the Options Bar, click
21 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Sash for the Name, and click OK.
24 Below the red dot, sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.
NOTE When you sketch the frame profile, the exact dimensions are not critical. However, the frame profile
should extend beyond the edges of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent
steps.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 Select the right edge of the frame section, and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.
27 Select the left edge of the frame section, and drag it to the interior face of the wall. When the lock displays,
click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face.
28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it
with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays, click it to lock the line to the reference plane.
34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot; this is the top of the window opening.
Next, select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.
The entire sash outline is selected, and lock icons display on each line.
Click
Click
8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right, as shown.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter,
and click OK.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected, and
click to create the glass boundary.
22 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, specify Glass for the Subcategory instance
parameter, and click OK.
NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project, you can
control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box.
23 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Click Apply.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. For example, make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion
remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.
27 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
28 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry on page 449.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the
mullion centerline locations as shown.
NOTE When you draw each reference plane, the exact location is not critical. Precise dimensions are assigned
to the reference planes in subsequent steps.
5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference
plane below it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal
reference plane above it, as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
21 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name,
and click OK.
22 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
23 On the Options Bar, enter 14 mm for Depth, and click
24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Do not
be concerned with precise dimensions. However, it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the
horizontal edges of the sash. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash.
After you complete the sketch, notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.
25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height.
28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion, and place it
above the dimension you placed in the previous steps.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following parameters:
Select Type.
Click OK.
32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as
shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps.
33 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes.
Click Apply.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters, and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
NOTE After flexing the model, it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as
expected. In this case, you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered,
evenly spaced, and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems
early. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines, or undoing the same.
37 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value.
43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown, and
then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash.
48 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the dimension you added in the previous step.
49 On the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label. Move the dimension value as shown.
50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane
as shown. Remember, follow these basic steps:
NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.
Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality
constraint.
Select the dimension, and on the Options Bar, select Mullion Width for Label.
Click Apply.
Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window
height.
58 In the Family Types dialog box, return the window to its original dimensions:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
59 Proceed to the next exercise, Assigning Materials to the Window Components on page 461.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
for Texture.
5 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine, Yellow/, select Stained, Dark, No
Gloss, and click OK.
6 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame, sash, and mullions
7 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Exterior.
8 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
9 Select the window frame sweep, the sash, and the mullions.
TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.
12 Under Materials and Finishes, click
for Material.
13 In the Materials dialog box, select Pine Frame for Name, and click OK.
14 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Edit for Visibility.
15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box, under View Specific Display, select Front/Back and
When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits); clear the other view options.
16 Under Detail Levels, verify that Coarse, Medium, and Fine are selected, and click OK.
17 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The window frame, sash, mullions, and glass display their assigned materials.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, Defining New Window Types on page 464.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
The window height is doubled, but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions.
5 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 1000 mm for Height, and click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
You now have three new window types defined within your window family.
15 On the File menu, click Save.
16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name, Training Window.rfa.
35 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. This completes the Creating
a Window Family lesson.
Finally, you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family, and specify
values for the furniture length and depth.
The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template; they represent the furniture
centerline axes.
8 Draw two vertical reference planes, one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline
reference plane as shown.
11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. It should reference the
left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.
17 To the right of the dimension you just created, add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference
plane to the lower reference plane, as shown.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore, you should flex
the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected.
Click Apply.
Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. When the solid geometry is snapped
to the reference planes, it will also adapt to the same changes.
32 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry on page 475.
3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle, and then select the
lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle.
NOTE In the image below, the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Your lines may have
a lighter weight.
9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines, press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection
option, and click to select all four symbolic lines.
14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm.
15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop, press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in
the Status Bar, and select the bottom edge.
16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.
19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
32 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry on page 478.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level.
2 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
3 On the Options Bar, click
4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane, and click to locate a new vertical reference plane
offset 100 mm to the right.
5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane, and click to locate a new horizontal reference
plane offset 100 mm below it.
7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Click the
lock icon as shown.
8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Lock the dimension
as shown.
14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle, and then
specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle, as shown.
A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.
23 For the align-to reference, select the horizontal reference plane second from the top, as shown below at
the cursor.
24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown.
Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base, and then
click the lock icon to lock the dimension.
Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base, and then click
the lock icon to lock the dimension.
28 Add two final dimensions, one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base, as shown.
29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion.
30 On the Options Bar, select <Add parameter...> for Label.
31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, specify the following:
Select Type.
Click OK.
32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.
33 On the Options Bar, select Drawer Base Width for Label.
34 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. However, notice that annotations display
in this view.
42 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
43 Click the Annotation Categories tab.
44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view, and click OK.
45 On the View Control Bar, click the Scale control and select 1:20.
Click Apply.
Click OK.
50 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry on page 487.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane, then move
the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm, and click to specify the upper left corner, as shown.
9 Select the desk top, then the lower horizontal sketch line, and click the lock icon to lock the alignment.
10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion, then select the right parallel sketch line, and lock
the alignment.
TIP You may need to click the down arrow button, and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu.
15 Select the left vertical sketch line, the upper sketch line, and then move the cursor down and to the right
until you create and arc similar to the image below. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of
the arc radius.
Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases
17 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base, select the left edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base, select the right edge of the rolltop, and click the lock icon.
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry on page 493.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension.
10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer.
Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.
NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base
width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the
dimensions, zoom the view until you do.
, and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the
, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.
These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK.
19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
20 On the View toolbar, click
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click
for Material.
for Texture.
27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished.
28 Click OK.
29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.
The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that
did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints.
35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types on page 496.
Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.
15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges.
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component.
17 On the Options Bar, click Load.
18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open.
19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm.
20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.
You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the
Creating a Furniture Family lesson.
Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.
Dataset
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric Templates folder. Select
Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.
The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at
the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles
for the baluster are also displayed.
13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion.
14 Click the lock icon.
15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa.
The new custom baluster is now complete.
The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster
Family lesson.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.
3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa.
The new sweep profile is now complete.
Dataset
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa.
The new rail profile is now complete.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.
Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.
The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.
Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa.
The new stair nosing profile is now complete.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa.
The new reveal profile is now complete.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.
Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open.
The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical
reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference
plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.
4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa.
The new host sweep profile is now complete.
4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click
OK.
5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.
20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit.
21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click
23 Click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical.
4 Draw four walls as shown.
6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Wall Sweep.
7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected.
8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.
9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.
Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library Load Family.
12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open.
13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click
The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile.
This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric Templates folder. Select
M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.
The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.
15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK.
16 Zoom in on the label.
20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location.
21 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Ceiling Finish, and click OK.
22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location.
23 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Area, and click OK.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select
Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open.
Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template
1 In the Project Browser, notice that there is only one view available.
The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Notes included with
the template specify annotation parameters.
4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.
7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.
8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.
9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.
The titleblock has linework, text, and labels. You customize the titleblock with a new text style, graphics, and your
project data.
In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Templates folder. Select A0
metric.rft, and click Open.
4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner, and then specify the lower right
corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.
6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line, and click to draw a new vertical line.
, and click
10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown.
11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select the second and third horizontal lines.
13 In the Type Selector, select Wide Lines.
14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
15 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
16 In the Type Selector, select Title Blocks.
17 On the Options Bar, click
18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.
19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.
20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line, and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the
existing line.
Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text.
17 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the last text note.
18 Select the drag handle, and drag the text note down as shown.
Consultant:
Address:
Address:
Telephone:
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the consultant text note.
26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.
27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.
43 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Issue Date, and click OK.
The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.
44 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field, and click to specify the label location.
46 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Drawn By, and click OK.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field, and click to specify the label location.
48 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Checked By and click OK.
NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.
62 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field, and click to specify the label
location.
64 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Project Name, and click OK.
65 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field, and click to specify the label
location.
67 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Client Name, and click OK.
68 Select the left drag handle on the label, and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.
81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock.rfa.
The titleblock graphics, text, and labels are now complete.
10 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, enter Name for Drawn By, and click OK.
11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.
14 Click OK.
NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. To change the units of measurement to meters,
on the Settings menu, click Project Units. Set the Length units to millimeters, set the Area to Square meters, format the Area
to use 2 decimal places, and set the suffix to None.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, select Training and navigate to the Common folder.
Next, you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.
2 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
10 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form
11 On the Design Bar, click Axis.
12 On the Options Bar, click
13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and
then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.
16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center
point.
17 Move the cursor out, until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.
The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.
The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.
19 On the Options Bar, click
20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.
21 Snap to reference plane intersections, and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse
C as shown.
25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.
The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.
28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.
29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.
33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall, and then draw a vertical line
down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.
35 Select the interior face of the wall, and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment
to keep.
for Material.
38 In the Materials dialog box, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name, and click OK.
39 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
40 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
41 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Floors for Family Category, and click OK.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter Concave Floor for Name, and click OK.
4 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click South.
9 In the Go To View dialog box, select Section: Wall Section - Center, and click Open View.
12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis, and
then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.
15 Specify the intersection of the T.O. Footing level line and the axis, for the start point of the floor profile
as shown.
NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point.
16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm, and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.
17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile as shown.
18 Specify the intersection of the T.O. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the
floor profile.
19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.O. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor
profile.
for Material.
22 In the Materials dialog box, select Cobblestone for Name, and click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
25 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.
26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click 3D Section View.
14
In this tutorial, you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. During this tutorial,
you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. In exercises that become increasingly
complex, you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other
families in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1.
The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. In this case,
the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In the center of the
truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The truss also has multiple types,
formula-based parameters, assigned subcatecories, and detail level controls. This type of component uses
a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor.
The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation, not
specifically how to make a floor truss. At the end of this tutorial, you will understand the process,
methodology, and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component.
539
The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In this case, the beam design
must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.
NOTE When creating a new family, you should avoid over-designing the component. If the design requirements
can be met with a simple design, then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. For
every complexity added to a family, there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project.
Take this into consideration during your design planning.
For instance:
You have completed the planning stage for the new family. Depending on the family you are designing,
the planning stage and questions may differ.
4 Continue with the next exercise, Selecting the Family Template on page 541.
Like most generic family templates, it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and
Center (front/back).
6 In the New dialog box, scroll to the structural framing templates.
There are two structural framing templates provided.
This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping,
spacing, and display functions required by structural beams.
7 Select Metric Structural Framing - Complex and Trusses.rft, and notice the preview.
Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template, it is not the best starting point for
the beam family.
8 Select Metric Structural Framing - Beams and Braces.rft and notice the preview.
Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. These
planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping
and display requirements of beam components. This template is the best starting point for the new family.
In this view, you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line.
11 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.
Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. When a beam family based on this template
is added to a project, the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view.
12 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.
This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Like many templates, the geometry
supplied can be used or discarded as needed.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating the Component Skeleton on page 544.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.
The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam
component. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.
These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan
view display setting is coarse.
Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference
planes, it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.
In a later exercise, you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep.
8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back).
You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference
plane: Center (Front/Back).
12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level.
TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this, select the lower horizontal reference
plane, click
on the Edit toolbar, and select the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis.
These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. This beam requires additional
reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.
13 On the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
14 On the Options Bar, click
The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords.
15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. When a copy of the reference plane displays below
it, click to place it.
TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend
to pick.
16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays
above it, click to place it as shown.
17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the right of it, click to place it as shown.
18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right, and when a copy of the reference plane displays to
the left of it, click to place it as shown.
You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to
the next exercise, you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase.
19 On the Options Bar, specify an Offset of 200 mm.
20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the left of it, click to place it as shown.
21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right), and when a copy of the reference plane displays
to the right of it, click to place it as shown.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
This tool is the aligned dimension tool. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.
3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. After adding
the dimension, separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.
NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. You may need to use the TAB key
to toggle the selection to the reference plane.
11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane
and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously.
13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference
plane, and place it below the dimension you added previously.
You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to
changes. Throughout the tutorial, you will add additional reference planes, dimensions, and constraints
as needed.
In the next exercise, you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters
are the key to providing flexibility within a project. In addition, they allow you to flex the model in
order to test your design.
16 Click File menu Save.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating New Length Parameters on page 554.
If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained, consider making it a type parameter.
If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible, consider making it an instance parameter.
If the component has material that varies per component, consider making the material parameter an instance
parameter.
If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature, consider making it a type parameter.
You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Select Type.
This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
Select Type.
Click OK.
TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.
17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side
of the center chase as shown.
Nesting a component.
When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box, rather than by manually stretching
or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the
most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.
In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even
though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust
to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and
be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing
area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner.
or
Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family
Types dialog box, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.
Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box.
2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model.
Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint
spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference
planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified
value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing breaks is the essence
of flexing.
4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply.
Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.
Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the parameters back to their original values:
Click Apply.
Click OK.
When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or
modify the existing design in any way.
6 On the File menu, click Save.
7 Proceed to the next lesson, Adding Solid Geometry on page 560.
7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
8 On the Tools toolbar, click
When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep.
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.
12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.
4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply.
Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension
references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference
planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length.
8 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.
11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown.
Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.
In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project.
This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes
as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to
test how it works within a project environment.
TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards,
flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.
14 Click OK.
In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays
and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.
Click Apply.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.
Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.
8 On the Tools toolbar, click
9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as
shown.
12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.
NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning
because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.
14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.
20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to
lock the alignment.
21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the
upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints.
25 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:
27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown.
This will make subsequent work much easier.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view.
32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label.
33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.
34 In the Family Types dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply,
and click OK.
41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.
55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper
horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.
56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset.
57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.
Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends,
they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.
64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss.
65 On the Tools menu, click Align.
66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.
67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point.
69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.
70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side.
TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the
constraints to the reference planes.
71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
74 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa file located in the Metric\Families folder.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
This project consists of foundation walls, a slab, a wood sill, and a wood rim joist. The rim joist was added
as a beam; therefore, the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.
2 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Structural.
4 In the Type Selector, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.
5 Using point-to-point insertion, add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.
NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. Try to make them approximately
equidistant as shown.
Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected.
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.
NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line, not the wall or rim joist. You do not need to be precise; you are merely
testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.
The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length.
The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.
In the next lesson, you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes
in length.
10 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag.
This should return the project to its original dimension.
11 On the File menu, click Save as.
12 In the Save as dialog box, navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.
IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. The project and family need to interact based on a
consistent file name.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
This family is a single extrusion as shown. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that
make it easier to array within the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to
the host family.
Notice the model lines that surround the web component; they are visible only when you place the cursor
over the component. In the following steps, you align the web panel using these lines rather than the
extrusion edges.
Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will be accomplished in the next
exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.
14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown.
15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the
center chase as shown.
Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this
lesson.
NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members
will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition, it is
important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints.
16 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.
22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.
23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.
Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component.
Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.
Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the
outside edge of the center chase.
In the next exercise, you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to
maintain the web position as the truss changes depth, length, or the width of the center chase.
26 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
27 On the File menu, click Save As.
28 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this
family there with its current name.
29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Formula-controlled Parameters on page 583.
3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box, under Parameter Data, do the following:
Select Type.
Click OK.
4 In the Family Types dialog box, under Constraints, enter Depth - (Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth
Formula.
TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field.
This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth.
NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. When you refer to another parameter within a formula, ensure you enter it
exactly as it is named.
5 Click OK.
9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select WebDepth, and click OK.
In the Type Properties dialog box, notice that = displays within the WebHeight button.
10 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. In addition, notice the center
of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula.
After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web.
28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label.
29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model
to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially
important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you dont multiply any existing problems.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
Select Constrain.
5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
Select Constrain.
12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner,
use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the
corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.
19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the
reference highlights, then select the line twice.
Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components
to each other.
20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.
21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.
22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the
same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.
NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each
other when you change the depth of the truss.
Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to
lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The
primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length.
31 Zoom around the left side of the truss.
32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.
Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing
the parameter value.
NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in
this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any,
significant impact.
37 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss.
39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right.
40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.
Click Apply.
The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.
TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify
it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced.
48 In the Family Types dialog box, reset the values as follows:
You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.
49 On the File menu, click Save.
50 Proceed to the next exercise, Reloading a Family into a Project on page 593.
Dataset
Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.
In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In
addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.
5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field.
6 In the Materials dialog box, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK.
7 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.
Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.
When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are
assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood
material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control
over component visibility within a project.
8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.
19 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
20 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
21 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.
24 In the Filter dialog box, click Check None, select Other, and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.
26 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and
click OK.
27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the
Materials dialog box.
35 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate.
36 In the New Material dialog box, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK.
37 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click
38 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for
Name, and click OK.
39 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
40 In the Object Styles dialog box, click OK.
41 Select the web extrusion.
42 On the Options Bar, click
43 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory,
and click OK.
Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components
without impacting other structural framing components.
52 Click OK.
53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss
- Webs, and click OK.
Notice the web extrusions not longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.
Select Instance.
Click OK.
7 In the Family Types dialog box, notice the default material is By Category.
In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will
continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to
assign a material on an instance parameter.
8 Click OK.
11 In the Filter dialog box, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss), and click OK.
Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.
12 On the Options Bar, click
13 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the
Material value field.
14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK.
15 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component.
17 On the Options Bar, click
28 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and
click the button that displays.
29 In the Materials dialog box, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK.
30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.
Datasets
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because
you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the
truss, all elements display at all times in all views.
Clear Left/Right.
Click OK.
Clear Left/Right.
Click OK.
Click OK.
Click OK.
26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium.
Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.
27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.
TIP You can also use new types to flex the model.
609
Curtain Systems
15
Curtain systems are not walls, and they are not windows. Like walls, they can define space and separate
the exterior from the interior. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows.
Like windows, they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows, curtain systems
are usually assembled on site as a single unit.
A typical curtain system comprises a wall, panel, grid lines, and mullions, and you can change these
elements individually. This affects the entire curtain system. For example, to resize the system, you need
to change the length of the wall. To switch panel types, you need to select a panel. To change grids, you
select the grid.
You can add curtain systems with the wall command, or you can use a specific curtain system command.
611
Creating an Entrance
In this exercise, you create a curtain system using the wall command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as
a curtain wall.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as
shown.
7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Southeast Isometric.
9 On the View menu, click Orient Northeast.
10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added.
Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base
constraint, top constraint, top and base attachments, and room bounding.
You want the curtain system to attach to the roof.
12 Under Constraints, specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint.
13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset, and click OK.
The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.
Right now, the curtain system is a single glazed panel. You are going to subdivide the panel into several
smaller panels, using curtain grids.
18 In the Project Browser, right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 - a, and click Rename.
19 Enter Entrance Elevation, and click OK.
20 In the drawing area, double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.
21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
22 Select a curtain grid line or edge of a wall, then click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the
ground floor level line.
24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed.
27 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Clipboard, or press CTRL + C on the keyboard.
28 On the Edit menu, click Paste Aligned Select Levels by Name.
29 In the Select Levels dialog box, hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR, THIRD FLOOR, FOURTH FLOOR,
FIFTH FLOOR, SIXTH FLOOR, and SEVENTH FLOOR, and click OK.
Next, you add a doorway to the curtain system. You do not use the Door command. Instead, you set up a
doorway on a curtain panel, and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.
38 Using the same method, remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in
the previous step.
TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions.
TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. To get the horizontal grid
to display between the vertical grids, click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.
48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid), click in any white space to exit the editor.
Next, you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors.
49 On the File menu, click Load From Library Load Family.
50 In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Doors.
51 In the Doors folder, select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl.rfa, and click Open.
52 Select the left 1800 mm panel. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Watch the Status Bar to be sure
you are highlighting the panel.
53 On the Type Selector, click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door.
The panel changes to a double door.
54 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door.
55 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
These panels schedule as doors, not as curtain panels. They are part of the curtain panel category.
56 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings
of the curtain wall doors.
Now, on the new curtain system you added, you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.
57 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Entrance Elevation.
58 On the View Control Bar, click
, and click Wireframe. This changes the graphics style of the view.
Changing panels
59 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.
60 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line.
69 On the File menu, click Save As. Name the file m_rvt9_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.rvt.
This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.
Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them; however, there are a few that you do not want, so
you remove them next. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary, because they reduce the doors
size by their widths.
Removing mullions
8 Zoom in on the set of doors.
9 Delete the mullions below them.
Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. You are going to change some mullion joins.
The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.
The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.
TIP After selecting the vertical mullion, you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions
menu to break the mullion at both joins.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
15 In the Project Browser, double-click Southeast Isometric.
16 Save the file.
This completes the exercise for adding mullions.
This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system
and how to subdivide it with grids. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. Finally, you learned how
to add mullions and change their joins.
Dataset
9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall.
The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Next, you place grids
on the system. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. You are going to use one of these
snaps points.
12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the
midpoint.
14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters, eighths,
and then sixteenths.
15 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click East.
16 Zoom in on the cylinder, and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.
Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.
7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference
line intersection.
10 Under Identity Data, specify Glass for Subcategory, and click OK.
11 On the Design Bar, click Model Lines, and on the Options Bar, click
. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see
The curved curtain systems structure now matches that of the main part of the building.
For vertical mullions, you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.
, enter 8 for Sides, and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius.
10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point.
Click again to specify the ending point. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same
location.
, and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.
32 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Circular Mullion for Family.
33 Click Edit/New.
34 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name, and click OK.
36 Under Construction, specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile.
37 Click OK twice.
38 On the Options Bar, select All Empty Segments.
39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder.
40 On the Design Bar, click Modify to exit placing mullions.
You have placed more mullions than you want, so next you remove the unwanted ones.
41 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click GROUND FLOOR.
42 Highlight a mullion in the arc, right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions
menu, and click DELETE.
Sloped Glazings
Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems.
Dataset
2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
4 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope.
6 Select the inside faces of the base walls.
TIP To chain select all the walls, place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls, and press TAB. All the
inside faces highlight, and you can click to select them all.
Storefront System
In this exercise, you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.
Dataset
You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.
3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
4 On the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
5 On the Options Bar, select Unconnected for Height, and enter 2400.
6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.
7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown.
8 Click the temporary dimension, enter 10200 mm, and press ENTER.
This specifies an exact length for the wall.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Southeast Isometric.
11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall.
The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout, which is specified in the type. To see how the grid
layout is defined, you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.
12 Select the storefront wall, and click
The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Under the
Vertical Grid Pattern heading, you find Number, Justification, Angle, and Offset. You see these same
parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern, the Number is the number of vertical
curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the
beginning, center, or end. By setting the Angle value, you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the
face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Horizontal
Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. For more information about
these curtain wall parameters, see the Revit Building help.
15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall, enter 45 for Angle (Vertical Grid Pattern) and 15 for Angle
(Horizontal Grid Pattern). Click OK.
16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Mullion, and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar.
17 Select a curtain grid.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Hidden Line for Graphics Style.
4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain System Curtain System by Lines.
5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab, making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line
is highlighted.
Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. Press TAB to select the line
if it does not immediately highlight.
A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.
9 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 Select the panel, and click
Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system.
11 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box.
Next, you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.
NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system, but now that you have created a ruled
curtain system, you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want.
12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Curtain Grid.
13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps, place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves, quarters,
and then eighths.
Roofs
16
In this tutorial, you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1. In addition,
you learn how to add fascia, gutters, and soffits to the roofs that you create.
641
Creating Roofs
In this lesson, you learn to create several different types of roofs, including hip, gable, shed, and mansard roofs. You
create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building.
You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can
sketch the roof profile, you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work
plane; a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
3 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Name, and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Go To View dialog box, verify that Section: Section1 is selected, and then click Open View to select
a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.
6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box, verify Level 3 is selected for Level, and click OK.
The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.
Before you can sketch the profile of the roof, you need to define four reference planes to help determine
key points on the profile sketch.
7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face.
TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially, you can place it in the general
location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from
the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.
9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.
10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.
15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.
The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.
Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately.
Next, use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior
walls.
17 On the Tools toolbar, click
18 Select the edge of the roof, and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage
wall.
Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of
the house that joins the breezeway.
19 On the Tools toolbar, click
20 Select the breezeway roof edge, press TAB, and then select the exterior face of the wall.
The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof, so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof.
21 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections (Type 1), and double-click Section 1.
22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
23 Select one of the breezeway walls, press CTRL, and select the second wall.
24 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.
25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.
27 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 646.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to
define the roof gable ends.
To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch, you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
2 In the Go To View dialog box, verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected, and click Open View.
3 Next, sketch the roof footprint.
On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, verify that Defines slope is selected, and enter 600 for Overhang.
5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line
displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.
Next, edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
10 Press CTRL, select both slope definition lines, and on the Options Bar, click
The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. By default, the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000
mm run.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof
slope, and click OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
13 When you see the informational dialog box, click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to
the roof.
14 On the View toolbar, click
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 648.
You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. After you define the roof
slope lines and complete the footprint, you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. When you
complete the roof, the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, clear Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
9 Using automatic snaps, sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the
lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.
10 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.
Next, add new slope lines to the roof.
11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.
13 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration.
19 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 650.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Roofs.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Options Bar, select Defines slope, and enter 600 for Overhang.
Next, close the roof sketch. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The
sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other.
6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
7 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and click
8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building, using the following
illustration for guidance.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
10 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
11 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical slope definition line, and then specify a point near
the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.
Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.
12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house.
Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the
roof.
21 Click
to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.
22 Using the same method that you used previously, join the two remaining walls to the roof. Press and hold
CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.
Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next, use the Join Roof
command to fix the roof.
24 Select the edge of the hip roof, and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.
25 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 653.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Pick Walls.
4 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope, and enter 300 for Overhang.
5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way, press TAB, and then click to select
all three of the entry way walls.
Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the
walls.
Next, trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these
lines to create a valid sketch.
9 On the Options Bar, verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.
10 To trim the first line segment, select the left vertical roof line, and then select a point near the midpoint
of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you
want to keep.
11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.
14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope, and press ENTER.
20 Click
21 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 655.
4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
5 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom in Region, and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.
Before you can add slope arrows, you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. To help
locate the position of each split, you need to add two reference planes.
6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane.
7 On the Options Bar, click
8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch.
Next, change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.
11 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.
12 On the Options Bar, clear Defines Slope.
Next, add two new slope arrows.
13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Slope Arrow.
14 On the Options Bar, verify
is selected.
15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line:
Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of
the slope arrow tail.
Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays, and then select it to specify the location
of the slope arrow head.
NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof, use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.
4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition).
5 On the Options Bar, select Defines Slope.
6 With the two gable end lines selected, on the Options Bar, click
7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 800 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Align Eaves.
The eave lines display with a dimension. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch
plane.
9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. When aligning eaves, you must select one eave to use
to align both eaves.
Next, select a method to align the eaves.
10 On the Options Bar, select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the
eave height of the first eave.
11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.
Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave.
14 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
16 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Mansard Roof on page 658.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
In the next steps, you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
3 Select the roof and, on the Options Bar, click
4 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.
5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.
Next, create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.
7 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Footprint.
9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
10 On the Options Bar, click
15 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 750 mm for Rise/1000, and click OK.
16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Roof.
17 On the View toolbar, click
18 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.
7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate.
8 In the Name dialog box, enter Built-up Fascia, and click OK.
9 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286
for Profile, and click OK twice.
10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.
12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.
Creating Gutters
In this exercise, you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium
building model.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep Roof Gutter.
2 On the Options Bar, click
8 In the Materials dialog box, select Metal-Aluminum for Name, and click OK three times.
9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.
11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.
12 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Soffits on page 662.
Creating Soffits
In this exercise, you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium
building model that you used in the previous exercise.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, c_Condominium.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Roof.
2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof Soffit.
3 On the Design Bar, click Pick Roofs.
4 Select the roof.
9 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique
name.
10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.
Area Analysis
17
In this tutorial, you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first
step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building
and Rentable. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. You then create area
plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Finally, you create area
schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans.
665
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Click OK.
Click OK.
Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings.
Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme, it is not necessary in this
exercise.
8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog box, click the Room Calculations tab.
You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.
At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.
You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations, as well as selecting whether
to have room volumes calculated automatically.
9 Click Cancel.
Click OK.
12 When the informational dialog box displays, click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.
When you select Yes in this dialog box, area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls
of the building model, forming a closed loop. If you select No, you must manually add these boundary
lines.
13 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).
Expand Area Plans (Gross Building), and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Area.
NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing
areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. To modify the area, you must select one of the
reference lines, rather than the area tag. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print.
15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag.
NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed
within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings.
Next, you create a new area plan for rentable space. You add and use area boundary lines to define the
office areas, common areas, and store area.
Click OK.
Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls.
NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Although the rule for these lines
is to follow the inside face of the wall, if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height, the area
boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.
Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable), and notice
that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.
19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.
Click OK.
Click OK.
34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps, add an area in the common space to the right of the double
doors hosted by the west exterior wall.
In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
Click OK.
35 Add an area to the building model core, enter Core for Name, and select Major Vertical Penetration for
Area Type.
36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3
and Tenant 4, and select Store Area for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right, and Tenant 4 in
the lower right.
Notice that within the two store areas, the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.
3 When the dialog box displays, click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.
9 Click OK.
The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the
schedule.
Massing
18
You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without
the level of detail usually found in a project. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that
aggregate to form the building model shell. At any time, you can pick massing faces and make building
model elements such as walls, floors, curtain systems, and roofs. After you make building elements, you
can specify the view to display massing elements, building elements, or both. Massing elements and
building elements are not linked automatically. If you modify a massing face, you then need to update
the building face.
In this tutorial, you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass.
After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model, you convert to the basic shell elements
of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view
to see how changes propagate throughout the project.
675
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
10 In the Materials dialog box, select Mass (Opaque) for Name, and click OK.
11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 25000 for Extrusion End, and click OK.
12 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
13 On the View toolbar, click
22 In the Materials dialog box, select Mass (Transparent) for Name, and click OK.
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for
Extrusion End, and click OK.
24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
25 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), double-click {3D} to see the results.
The second form is on top of the first form.
Next, you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.
34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown, and click to select the line start point.
The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.
TIP If you do not see this option, click the arrow next to the drawing options, and click Arc passing through
three points from the menu.
37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.
38 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and delete the vertical construction line.
39 Select the arc and the horizontal line.
40 On the Edit toolbar, click
41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.
42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.
53 Proceed to the next exercise, Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.
In this exercise, you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.
In the next exercise, you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.
Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 681
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, m_Massing_Start.rvt.
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
2 In the drawing area, select the mass.
5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted, and place the
first reference plane 15000 mm to the right.
6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.
7 Using the same technique, place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right, as shown.
When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow, you specify the intersection of the reference
planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. These reference planes act primarily as
sketching aids.
10 Enter SI for intersection snap, and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.
11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. When sketching each extrusion, snap the corners to the
intersections.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Open Box.rfa.
5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name, and click OK.
6 Enter 68000 mm for Width, 18000 mm for Height, and 9000 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name, and click OK.
8 Enter 46000mm for Width, 11000 mm for Height, and 6000 mm for Depth, and click Apply.
9 Click OK.
10 On the File menu, click Save As.
11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa.
In this exercise, you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
2 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
15 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.
16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown.
19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
21 In the Type Selector, select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500.
22 On the Options Bar, select Rotate after placement.
23 Place the cursor in the drawing area, and click to place the mass.
24 On the Options Bar, enter 90 for Angle.
25 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
26 In the drawing area, select the triangle, and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle
as shown.
28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Place Mass.
30 In the Type Selector, select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.
31 Place the box mass family as shown.
33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter, and click OK twice.
34 On the View toolbar, click
Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. In the next exercise, you join
these mass elements.
In this exercise, you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. You also loaded
other existing mass families and added them to the building model.
Dataset
Join geometry
1 On the View toolbar, click
NOTE When you join geometry, the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected
mass element.
3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.
4 Select the triangle, and then press ESC to see the result.
for Axis.
9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box, enter SM, and snap to the midpoint of the edge.
10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.
11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown.
TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.
Join geometry
13 On the View toolbar, click
15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first, and then select
the triangle.
16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.
17 Press ESC to see the result.
In this exercise, you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently
selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another
element.
Dataset
4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box, select Sloped (primary), clear Curved, and then click OK.
5 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
16 On the View Control Bar, click
22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property, and click OK twice.
23 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Elevations, double-click North.
28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box, select Curved, clear Sloped, and click OK.
29 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.
You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. Because it is likely that your client
prefers the design option with curved shapes, you can make it the primary option.
33 On the Design Options toolbar, click
34 In the Design Options dialog box, select Curved and, under Option, click Make Primary.
35 Click Close and close the warning that displays.
36 On the File menu, click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt.
In this exercise, you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options
to get different versions of the design.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Creating walls
4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
5 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Exterior - Brick on CMU.
6 On the Options Bar, click
7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.
8 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 3.
9 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
10 Select all the faces shown in red.
NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed, alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap, ignore the warning
and continue selecting wall faces.
11 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 5.
12 On the Design Bar, click Wall by Face.
13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
15 On the Design Bar, Click Wall by Face.
16 In the Type Selector, select Curtain Wall : Storefront.
17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.
You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. If desired, you can select the overlapping curtain
wall, and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping
geometry.
19 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 9.
20 On the View Control Bar, click
In this exercise, you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.
Dataset
Creating floors
5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1.
6 On the Options Bar, click Floor Area Faces.
7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box, select all levels, and click OK.
In this exercise, you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. You
then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model.
Dataset
Creating roofs
2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face.
3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.
7 With the Roof by Face command still selected, select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector.
8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.
9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.
10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 Click the Model Categories tab, select Curtain Panels, Curtain Systems, and Walls, and then click OK.
Dataset
8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected, select the blended form on the in-place mass.
Dataset
13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.
The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps, you remake several of the
building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family.
15 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.
TIP To select the curtain wall, press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls
: Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also, remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here;
you want to select the smaller one.
TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls, you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.
20 Select the roof as shown.
In this exercise, you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with
the new mass family.
In this exercise, you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.
This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired, you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components, such
as columns and an extruded roof, to the building shell. You might create the model shown.
Grouping
19
Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1, you can create reusable entities that
represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their
placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single
instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that
you place contain the modifications.
You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical
hotel guest room, and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest
room group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group.
Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working
on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency
within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group
from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized
for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed
to create, place, and modify repetitive units.
713
Creating Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units.
Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms, classrooms, and typical office layouts.
After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods.
You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving
the changes.
Creating a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical hotel room. You create the group by selecting drawing objects
and grouping them as a single entity.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Specify a view
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.
3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room.
The view is zoomed in to the selected room. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room
accurately.
Placing a Group
In this exercise, you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. You also
mirror an existing instance of a group, using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, Grouping-in progress.rvt.
Mirror a group
6 In the drawing area, select the original instance of the group.
7 On the Edit toolbar, click
8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection.
You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original
orientation and one mirrored, as shown.
9 On the File menu, click Save.
10 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying a Group on page 716.
Modifying a Group
In this exercise, you make changes to a single instance of a group. When you finish the editing routine, all instances
of the same group in the drawing are updated.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise, Grouping-in progress.rvt.
1 In the drawing area, select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group.
2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Group.
The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. All other elements in the
model are grayed out.
3 Press and hold CTRL, and select the desk and chair.
4 On the Edit toolbar, click
5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point.
All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
9 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Nested Groups on page 717.
Create a group
1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group, select all the elements that make up the toilet
room and closet. In the selection, make sure you also include both doors and their host walls, and the wall
separating the bathroom and closet.
3 In the Project Browser, expand Groups, expand Model, right-click Group 1, and click Rename.
4 Enter Typical toilet room, and press ENTER.
The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group, and all instances are updated to
include the nested group.
12 On the File menu, click Save.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying a Nested Group on page 719.
4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room.
All instances of the nested group are updated with the change.
12 On the File menu, click Save.
13 Proceed to the next lesson, Working with Groups on page 720.
In subsequent exercises, you add door tags to a group, and then save the tags as an attached detail group. You work
with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups, because
attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.
Lastly, having created a group that represents a typical layout, you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other
team members for use in other projects. When you load the group from the library into a new project, you can then
work with it in the context of the new project. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies
among instances of a group, but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group.
Duplicating a Group
In this exercise, you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. You then place the new
group in the building model, and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested
within it. After you finish the modified group, you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so
that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom.
Dataset
Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson, Grouping-in progress.rvt.
Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior
rooms.
12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room.
Nest a group
17 In the Project Browser, select Corner toilet room, and drag it into the corner guest room.
Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group.
18 On the Options Bar, click Finish to finish placing the group.
19 In the drawing area, select the Corner guest room group.
20 On the Options Bar, click Edit Group.
21 On the Design Bar, click Add To Group.
22 In the drawing area, select the Corner toilet room group.
23 On the Design Bar, click Finish Group.
TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored, click Unjoin Elements to resolve
the errors.
for Axis.
27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown.
TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall, enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints.
28 Drag the cursor to the left, past the exterior wall, staying perpendicular to the corridor wall, and click to
specify the end point.
A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model.
29 On the File menu, click Save.
30 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Detail Group on page 723.
3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.
4 Move the cursor down and to the right, and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall.
5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.
A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.
The text note with arc leader is added to the building model.
A warning dialog box is displayed, informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the
Typical toilet room group.
8 In the Project Browser, expand Groups, expand Attached Detail, and expand Typical toilet room.
9 Right-click Group 1, and click Rename.
10 Enter Door tags, and press ENTER.
The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in
the original instance of the model group.
NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential; therefore, the doors are numbered based upon the order
in which you placed each group.
14 On the File menu, click Save.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Saving and Loading Groups on page 726.
In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse.
In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the Training Files icon, and open
Metric\Templates.
Sketch walls
9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
10 On the Options Bar, click
to draw a square.
11 In the drawing area, click to specify the start point of the square, and then drag the cursor so that all the
walls in the square are 6000 mm long.
IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. The toilet and
the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group, so it is important to place the group
accurately in order to use the walls you sketched.
14 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project.
15 On the File menu, click Save.
16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name, and click Save.
17 Proceed to the next exercise, Automatically Creating a Group on page 727.
3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection.
Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance, a warning dialog box is displayed.
4 In the warning dialog box, click Fix Groups.
5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box, click Create new group types, and click OK.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored, and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. The
tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it.
7 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.
Site
20
In this tutorial, you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 to add and modify site components
within a project.
729
Creating a Toposurface
In this exercise, you create a toposurface using two different methods. Using the first method, you create a toposurface
by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the second part of this exercise, you import contour data from
a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. A toposurface must have at
least three elevation points.
7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. The circle should be
approximately 55000 mm wide.
TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.
10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm, 12000mm, 15000mm, and 18000mm absolute elevations. Try to
add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. Use the following illustration as a reference.
15 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
16 On the View toolbar, click
to delete it.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South.
Before importing the contour data, modify the level names and elevations.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head, click the elevation value, enter 1000mm, and press ENTER.
21 Click the Level 2 text, rename the level Basement, and press ENTER.
22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views, click Yes.
23 Click the Level 1 text, rename the level Base Site Elevation, and press ENTER.
Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views.
24 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
25 On the File menu, click Import/Link CAD Formats.
26 In the Import/Link dialog box:
Under Import or Link, select Current view only and choose Select for Layers.
Click Open.
You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.
27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box, clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark, and click OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view.
29 Select the imported topography.
Until it is exploded, it is considered an import symbol.
30 On the Edit menu, click Pin Position.
This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved.
When you select the import symbol, you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation
points.
38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box, clear C_INDX, and click OK.
This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not
completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
Click Modify.
Using the 3-point Arc tool, add an arc line on the right.
NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.
7 Move the cursor over the property lines and, when they highlight, select the lines.
8 On the Options Bar, select Edit Table.
A warning dialog box is displayed, informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot
be undone.
9 In the warning dialog box, click OK.
10 In the Property Lines dialog box, click OK.
NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of
your sketch.
to delete them.
100000 S 00'0" E
80000 N 900'0" W
100000 N 00'0" E
80000 N 900'0" E
Notice that after you complete the last line, the distance that displayed under From last to first point now
displays Closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. If the gap is not closed, review your data
entry and make necessary corrections.
16 Click OK.
The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.
17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference, click to
place the property lines.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK.
11 Click OK.
The object style subcategory, Working Contour, displays on the topography only at the elevation you
specified.
12 On the File menu, click Close. Click Yes when prompted to save changes.
The next exercise requires a new dataset.
13 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Topographic Subregions on page 742.
In this exercise, you created a new object style subcategory for topography. You then modified the site setting to
distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory.
In the next exercise, you create topographic subregions to define roads, parking areas, and islands.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE In the Metric dataset, you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise.
Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the sketch in a
later step, the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.
Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site - Tarmacadam. Although you can select each toposurface
region separately and apply different properties to each, the toposurface and its contour data remain one
element.
You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.
Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.
WARNING Subregions cannot intersect, so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100
mm.
NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project, there is still only one toposurface.
If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion, you must either edit the entire toposurface
or split the toposurface.
36 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Topography Schedule.
Notice that the schedule has been updated.
38 Navigate to your preferred folder, name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt, and click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
39 Proceed to the next exercise, Grading the Toposurface on page 749.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
4 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
A warning dialog box is displayed, stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter
and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase
to match the toposurface.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter.
RELATED For more information regarding phasing, see the tutorial, Using Phasing on page 854.
10 Press DELETE.
Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing, demolished,
and new.
11 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.
13 Press DELETE.
19 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
20 On the View toolbar, click
The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. This accounts for
the red surface that you see in this view.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
6 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
7 On the View toolbar, click
, and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the parking space.
6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking
area.
NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.
7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned
and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.
TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.
, and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new
12 In the Type Selector, choose any tree type, and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown
below.
13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below.
NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration, the landscape shown
in the previous illustration has been rendered.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box, select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag
M_Parking Tag: Boxed, and click Apply.
4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed, click Apply,
and click OK.
5 On the View menu, click Hidden Line.
6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.
Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise, you use a parking schedule to
number the parking spaces.
NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.
7 On the File menu, click Save.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise, this project file is required in its current state.
8 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 760.
Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Site tutorial-in progress.rvt.
13 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, number the first three spaces consecutively.
Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the
cursor in the parking schedule, the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know
which space you are numbering.
14 In the Parking Schedule, under Space, finish numbering the remaining spaces.
Structural
21
In this tutorial, you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 to create a building model
skeleton. You begin by adding the structural walls, columns, and beams to Level 1. After completing
level 1, you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three
levels above it. In the final lesson, you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building
model.
763
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
764 | Chapter 21
Structural
4 In the Import/Link dialog box, under Import or Link, specify the following:
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
Select Depth.
Click
Select Chain.
In the steps that follow, you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration.
7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain.
8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line, and click to specify the wall endpoint.
766 | Chapter 21
Structural
9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection, and click to specify the next wall endpoint.
10 Move the curser to the right, and click the next line intersection.
11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a
parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left, and click to complete the chain of walls.
14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.
15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.
768 | Chapter 21
Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins
grid C.
When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain, zoom in to ensure you select
the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.
Structural
Clear Chain.
Click
27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc.
Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the left extent of the arc.
Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc.
Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees.
29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown.
30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.
770 | Chapter 21
Structural
34 Select the horizontal wall, click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C, enter 1500, and
press ENTER.
36 On the Design Bar, click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar, clear Chain.
In the steps that follow, you create the final structural walls for the project. Both walls are 1200 mm long.
772 | Chapter 21
Structural
Select
On the Options Bar, click Options to specify the wall pick options.
In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box, select Intersecting Walls, and click OK.
5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall, and when it highlights, select it.
6 Move the cursor to the left, and click to place the dimension as shown.
774 | Chapter 21
Structural
11 Click the temporary dimension value, and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and
grid B.
776 | Chapter 21
Structural
778 | Chapter 21
Structural
TIP To create the crossing selection, specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5, and drag your cursor
up and to the left as shown below.
Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.
13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position.
14 If necessary, zoom out until you can see all the grids.
15 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
This completes this set of columns.
18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below, press the SPACEBAR to rotate them.
Columns B3-5 are shown below.
TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR, the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. Although
you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns, you could not have rotated them independently
of each other. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns
B1-5.
19 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Select column A5 and delete it.
780 | Chapter 21
Structural
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
782 | Chapter 21
Structural
Column*
Brace
Horizontal
Brace
Girder
Girder
Brace
Horizontal
Bracing
Girder
Joist
Purlin
Other
Other
Horizontal
Bracing
Girder
Joist
Purlin
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Other
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Horizontal
Bracing
Other
Joist
Joist
Purlin
Other
Purlin
Purlin
Other
Purlin
Other
Joist
Purlin
Other
Other
16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column.
17 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
18 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model.
784 | Chapter 21
Structural
Notice beams are added between columns. In addition, notice that beams connect to the structural walls
that intersect grids.
25 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain.
786 | Chapter 21
Structural
The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. If the
W310x32.7 beam had crossed grid A, it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed
first, and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.
36 On the Options Bar, click Grid.
37 Select grid B.
38 On the Options Bar, click Finish.
788 | Chapter 21
Structural
46 Move the cursor to the right, enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints), and click the endpoint of the short
wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below.
55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall, and click when it intersects grid 2.
790 | Chapter 21
Structural
56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall, and click when it intersects grid 1.
Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
792 | Chapter 21
Structural
9 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Structural, notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.
This value was set automatically because when you created the beam, the Automatic option was selected
by default in the Options Bar. In addition, according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson,
any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected.
10 Click OK.
Click
13 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point.
14 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Once the direction
is set, enter 1250 and press ENTER.
794 | Chapter 21
Structural
Add purlins
15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar, click Beam.
16 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the
next joist on the right as shown.
Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders, joists, and purlins. Their display
in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value.
NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight, style, and color within the Object Styles dialog box.
18 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps.
19 On the Edit menu, click Array.
20 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Click
21 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point.
22 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right, and click.
796 | Chapter 21
Structural
25 In the Filter dialog box, clear all options except Structural Framing, and click OK.
26 On the Options Bar, click
27 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, change the following instance parameters:
Click OK.
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and notice the connection symbols display.
798 | Chapter 21
Structural
Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.
In the Project Browser, notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed.
7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown.
Each level is 3000 mm high.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
800 | Chapter 21
Structural
2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. Make sure the entire building model is included.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
802 | Chapter 21
Structural
You can now view the new elevation, Elevation 1-a, in the Project Browser.
6 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view.
Notice the stick framing representation. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set
to coarse. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view.
You are ready to add the structural braces.
8 On the File menu, click Save.
This project file is required, in its current state, to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.
In this exercise, you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.
In the next exercise, Adding Structural Braces on page 803, you add c-channel bracing to the building model.
Dataset
This exercise requires the project file, Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.
4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.
804 | Chapter 21
Structural
7 Enter SE and click the endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.
Click
Select Constrain.
12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.
13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.
The braces are arrayed to Level 1.
806 | Chapter 21
Structural
14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged.
15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box, select Structural Framing Tags, and click OK.
808 | Chapter 21
Structural
Sharing Projects
22
When working with large building projects, architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned
to a specific functional area. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of
the project at the same time, called Worksharing. In this tutorial, you learn how to use Worksharing to
divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes
coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building 9.1.
You can enable Worksharing for any project. A workset is a collection of building elements, such as walls,
doors, floors, stairs, and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. All other team
members can view this workset; however, they cannot make changes to it. This prevents possible conflicts
within the project. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is
actively working on, you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish
control of the entire workset.
Using Worksharing, team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a
local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.
They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have
published.
809
Overview
Sharing a project for the first time
To share a project, you must first enable Worksharing. The first time you activate worksets within a project, a dialog
box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared, each building element
in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element
within the property dialog box for that element.
General Considerations:
Project size
Team size
You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature
correctly. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will
maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project.
Project size
The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD
Xrefs, you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Instead, you should separate the
project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In a multi-story
structure, you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor, such
as a tenant interior. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets,
you may want to create separate worksets for each portion.
Team size
You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You should
have at least one workset for each person, not including the Project Standards, Shared Levels and Grids, and View
worksets. In most projects, greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members.
Experience has shown that, for a typical project, the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each
team member.
TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use, make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately.
Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file, make any
required worksets editable, save to the central file, and then save the local file.
When working remotely, you work no differently then you would in the office. You can modify any
elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can also
add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable.
If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going
remote, you can make the workset Editable at Risk. In this situation, you will not be able to save your
changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those
changes back to the central file. In this instance, if you know who checked out the required workset, you
may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you choose
Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file,
you will not only lose the changes to that workset, you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets.
If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset, you can save
your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.
Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost, you should use it only
when:
You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file, or
You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. If you have
a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file, you may want to request that someone
start a session of Revit Building, change the username to your name under Settings Options, and
make that workset editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the
remainder of your absence.
Remote rendering
4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender is supported, it is not recommended unless you understand
the implications for the rest of the team. If you intend to render the building model while away from the
office, you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. To do this, you should
check out the Materials workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any
materials while you have the Materials workset checked out.
In this conceptual exercise, you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. You learned the basic steps of
project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.
In the next exercise, you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Enable Worksharing
1 On the File menu, click Worksets.
A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. It also
informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets.
2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.
The Worksets dialog box is displayed.
Families
Project Standards
Views
5 Scroll down the list of workset names, and notice all are editable by you.
6 Under Show, turn off Families, Project Standards, and Views.
Only User-Created worksets should display.
In this simple training project, a small number of team members are working on the building model. For
training purposes, imagine four users including yourself. The project must be subdivided in such a way as
to reflect the tasks of each user. In this case, one user is assigned to the development of the exterior, another
is assigned the interior layout, a third team member is assigned furniture placement, and the remainder
of the team must work on wall section details.
Therefore, you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently.
Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Because the interior walls appear in many views, it
is better to make them visible by default.
9 Click OK.
The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Because furniture should only be visible in specific
views, you should turn off Visible by default in all views. This improves performance since fewer components
need to be generated in each view.
10 Click New.
11 Enter Furniture Layout, clear Visible by default in all views, and click OK.
The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Rather than create a new workset for
these elements, you can rename the default workset, currently named Workset1.
12 In the Worksets dialog box, select Workset1.
13 Click Rename.
14 In the Rename dialog box, type the name Exterior Shell, and click OK
You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The next step is to
assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. This is why all worksets are editable
immediately after you enable worksets.
15 In the Worksets dialog box, click OK.
When you initially activate Worksharing, all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default.
Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell, all building model elements are assigned to that workset.
In this training file, furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do
not need to be moved to the respective workset. You do, however, need to reassign the interior elements
to the Interior Layout workset.
19 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, notice that the Workset parameter is set to
Exterior Shell.
20 Click OK.
21 Select one of the interior walls.
22 On the Options Bar, click
23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click
OK.
24 Select all of the interior elements, including the interior doors, stairs, and walls.
The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper
left corner.
TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element.
26 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click
OK.
You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning
off the visibility of that workset.
27 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Worksets tab.
Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. This is because you
turned off Visible by default in all views when you created the workset.
29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.
30 Click OK.
The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. If any interior elements remain,
select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.
37 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, select Interior Layout for Workset, and click
OK.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets you select
and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced workset is opened but
hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance
while you work.
4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box, select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
5 On the File menu, click Save As.
6 In the Save As dialog box, click Options.
7 In the File Save Options dialog box, verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected,
and click OK.
8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1, and click Save.
You have created a local file which is for your use only. Next, you check out worksets so you can modify
the building model.
16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset
that is not currently editable.
18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity Data, notice that this element is assigned to the
Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank.
Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset, you can still edit this wall.
19 Under Constraints, select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line, and click OK.
Because this element is not owned by another user, Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your
changes. If it was owned by another user, a message would display and you would have the option to cancel
the change or make the element editable.
The upper exterior wall should still be selected.
20 On the Options Bar, click
Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset; however, the Edited by value is now assigned
to you.
21 Click OK.
22 On the File menu, click Worksets.
In the Worksets dialog box, notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset, but you are listed as a
borrower of that workset. In this case, you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall.
23 Click OK.
All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you
place the cursor over any of the new elements, a tooltip, which matches the information in the Status Bar,
displays the workset as well as the element type.
When working in your local file, you should perform regular saves. It is recommended that you locally
save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours.
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
37 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise, leave this
file open in its current state.
In this exercise, you created your local file, checked out worksets, and borrowed an element from a workset you did
not own. You modified the building model, and published your changes back to the central file where other team
members can see them.
Regardless of which central file you choose to use, one user has already created a local file. For training
purposes, consider that person to be User 1. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen
central file is User 2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Throughout the remainder of this
exercise, instructions are staggered, specifically sequenced, and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.
User 1: Check out worksets, modify the building model, and publish changes
17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If it is not open, open it now.
18 On the File menu, click Worksets.
Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.
19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.
A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked
out by another user.
20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box.
21 Select the Interior Layout workset, and select Yes for Editable.
Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. If you only have one
workset checked out, it becomes the active workset.
22 Click OK.
23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration, and move it to the left until it approaches
the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.
A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. This is because windows
are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.
31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.
32 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
33 In the Save to Central dialog box, select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.
34 Click OK.
When you save to central, you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the
building model. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.
35 Using the following illustration as a guide, delete the left window on the lower exterior wall, and move
the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.
37 In the Save to Central dialog box, select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved.
38 Click OK.
59 In the Rename dialog box, enter Exterior Wall - 200mm, and click OK.
60 Click OK twice.
61 On the File menu, click Worksets.
62 In the Worksets dialog box, under Show, select Project Standards.
63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types.
Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.
64 Click OK.
65 On the File menu, click Save to Central.
66 In the Save to Central dialog box, select:
Borrowed Elements
User-created Worksets
67 Click OK.
If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise,
leave this file open in its current state.
User-created Worksets
In this exercise, two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Each user checked out worksets, modified
the building model, and published their changes back to the central file.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively
working on.
If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial, Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
on page 825, leave this file open in its current state. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first
sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section, Checking out worksets.
NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial, you may receive a message informing you that the central file
has been relocated. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. These messages are a result of the central file being
relocated (to your PC). In subsequent steps, you save the dataset as a central file, and these problems are rectified.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it
from the Start menu.
Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Only the worksets you select
and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition, any referenced workset is opened but
hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance
while you work.
16 Select all the User-Created worksets, and click OK.
17 On the File menu, click Save As.
18 In the Save As dialog box, click Options.
19 In the File Save Options dialog box, verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected,
and click OK.
20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive, name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2, and click Save.
You have created a local file which is for your use only. Next, you check out worksets so you can modify
the building model.
A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.
32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by
modifying one of the temporary dimension values.
A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1.
33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window.
After you submit the request, a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.
At this point, you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element.
Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission.
36 Click Grant.
37 Click Close.
User-created Worksets
In this multi-user exercise, you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was
actively being edited by another user. In this case, you requested permission to edit the element, and the other user
granted it.
23
When working with a building model, it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project
develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options,
you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the
project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design
option), you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client.
In this tutorial, you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single
building model.
831
In the first exercise in this lesson, you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural
design option set. In the second exercise, you create two roof system design options that work with the structural
options. In the final exercise of this lesson, you learn how to manage and organize the design options, make your final
design decision, and delete the unwanted options from the project. These three exercises are designed to be completed
sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
The Copy command is a two-click process. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to
be copied, and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to.
In this case, the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. By
selecting Multiple, you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first
click). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.
13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch.
14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. Because it is important that you select the same
location on the notches you copy to, make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. In the following
illustration, the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.
TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.
15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.
16 Zoom in around the notch construction, and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.
Zoom in on the upper-left column, and click at its center to set the beam start point.
Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.
Zoom in on the upper right column, and click on the center to set the beam endpoint.
Use the following illustration as a guide. In it, two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the
location of the start and end points of the beam.
Constrain
Copy
Multiple
27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch, and click the center point.
This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.
28 Zoom out, move down to the next set of columns, zoom into the left column, and select the center of the
column to add a copy.
29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns.
Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.
Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them.
41 Under Option Set, click New.
42 Select Option Set 1 and, under Option Set, click Rename.
43 In the Rename dialog box, enter Roofing for New, and click OK.
44 Select the option set Roofing and, under Option, click New.
There should now be two roofing design options.
45 Under Roofing, select Option 1 (primary).
46 Under Option, click Rename, name the option Louvers, and click OK.
60 After aligning the beam, click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.
61 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Select Constrain
Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. The second click represents
the move end point.
64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.
65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click
to indicate the end point of the move.
Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.
Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system.
the other for beams. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. With the second option, you
created a unique in-place family as the structural system.
In the next exercise, you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options.
14 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, enter 11750 mm for Length, and click OK.
The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.
Select Constrain.
You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart.
17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam; click in the center
of the intersection to specify the array start point.
18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 990, and press
ENTER.
21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.
22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the louver you just placed.
23 On the Options Bar, click
24 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Other, enter 5475 mm for Length, and click OK.
The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.
25 With the louver still selected, click the Edit menu, and click Array.
26 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
Select Constrain.
27 For the array starting point, click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam.
28 Move the cursor vertically downward, and, when the listening dimension displays, enter 300, and press
Enter.
The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option.
36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Roof Roof by Extrusion.
37 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name, and click OK.
The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the dataset specifically for this purpose and is hidden
in all views.
38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK.
Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it, you only need to sketch a single line or a string
of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. In this case, you must create a draped canvas sunscreen.
Therefore, the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.
39 On the Design Bar, click Lines.
40 On the Options Bar, click
This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. The first two points define the ends of the
line, and the third point defines the arc.
41 Select the top of the left column, the top of the next column on the right, and then adjust the dip of the
arc until it is 60 degrees. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value
immediately after you create the line.
42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.
NOTE As you sketch the arcs, try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible, then you can modify
it through the dimension. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You will fix this
in a later step.
43 On the Design Bar, click Properties.
45 Click OK.
The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect
to the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.
46 On the Tools menu, click Trim/Extend.
47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. Select the right arc, then the center arc.
The arcs should connect.
Secondary Option
Tertiary Option
Last Option
6 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option.
7 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Design Options tab.
Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and
louver) are visible.
9 Click OK.
10 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Secondary Option.
11 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Design Options tab.
13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, and click OK.
14 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Tertiary Option.
15 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Design Options tab.
17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option, and click
OK.
18 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click Last Option.
19 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Design Options tab.
21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option, specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option, and click
OK.
At this point, all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the
client.
In this case, the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with
the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options, the beam and the louver roofing
should be selected as primary.
22 On the Tools menu, click Design Options Design Options.
23 In the Design Options dialog box, under Structure, select Beam.
24 Under Option, select Make Primary. This was the client choice for structural.
Because the client has selected the design option, the current primaries are no longer options; but should
be accepted as part of the building model.
25 Select Structure.
26 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary.
An alert is displayed, asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this
option set and remove the option set.
27 In the alert dialog box, click Yes.
The set is deleted, the beam option becomes part of the model, and you get a dialog asking if you want to
delete dedicated option views.
28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog box, click Delete to remove the views that used options, since
you no longer need them.
29 Select Roofing.
30 Under Option Set, click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model, delete the other design option
geometry and any dedicated option views.
31 In the alert dialog box, click Yes.
32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog box, click Delete.
33 In the Design Options dialog box, click Close.
34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views, double-click Primary Option. The other options were removed
along with any dedicated option views.
The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model.
Project Phasing
24
In any project, you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. Phases represent
distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can create as many phases as necessary and
assign building model elements to specific phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building
model information into views and schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project
documentation, complete with schedules. For the client, you can create a visual time line of phase-specific
3D views.
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation.
You create new phases, demolish existing construction, and then add new building model elements. In
the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase.
853
Using Phasing
In the lesson and exercises that follow, you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You create new
phases, demolish existing walls and doors, then add new walls and doors in a different location. This changes room
definition and total building model area.
In the second exercise, you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences
in the phase-specific room schedules.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
When you create a new project, two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. As you add
new elements to the building model, they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This
phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties.
You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. If
you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file, then new building
model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.
2 On the View menu, click View Properties.
3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Phasing, notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and
New Construction is selected for Phase.
This means that all building model elements, regardless of phase, are visible in this view. Any new elements
that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.
4 Click Cancel.
5 Select any of the exterior walls.
6 On the Options Bar, click
In the Element Properties dialog box, under Phasing, notice that New Construction is selected for Phase
Created, and None is selected for Phase Demolished.
7 Click Cancel.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.
After you release the mouse button, all of the building model elements, including the door tags, are
highlighted in red. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection.
10 On the Options Bar, click
11 In the Filter dialog box, clear Door Tags, and click OK.
12 On the Options Bar, click
13 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Phasing, select Existing for Phase Created, and click OK.
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase
and phase filter settings in the view properties.
Because this is a renovation project, it requires a plan view for demolition and new construction. After you
create the views, you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.
27 Click New.
A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.
28 Under Filter Name, click Filter 1, and enter Composite Plan.
29 For Composite Plan, under New, select Overridden.
This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New, Existing,
Demolished, and Temporary.
Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. That is
because doors are wall-hosted elements. When you demolish the host, you demolish all elements hosted
by it.
34 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Existing.
Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show
All.
56 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
All elements are displayed in this view, regardless of phase, because the phase filter is set to Show All. You
could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.
57 If necessary, spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls, which are displayed as red.
Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the
goals of this tutorial, you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so, go to the Settings menu,
click Project Units, define the units, and click OK.
Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase,
yet they have different room numbers.
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1 - Demo.
15 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar, click Room Tag.
16 Using the following illustration as a guide, add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior
wall. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.
Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new
construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. In this case, both views are assigned
the same phase yet have different phase filters.
Notice that in each phase-specific schedule, room information differs based upon the phase of the view
the tags are in. In addition, notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original
building model. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space
than the original.
In this exercise, you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also opened two
schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.
25
Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus, or of a group of related but
semi-independent sub-projects. In these situations, you can use model linking and shared coordinates
to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building
models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency, performance, and productivity by working in a
smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context.
Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates:
A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.
In this tutorial, you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has
been developed. You position the building models on the site plan, modify their visibility, and manage
the links throughout the project. In the final lesson, you share the coordinates so that the linked files
remember their location within the host project.
863
Center-to-Center: Revit Building places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.
NOTE The center of a Revit Building model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as
the footprint of your model changes.
Origin-to-Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit
Building model.
By shared coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates, this option
will place the link at a predefined location.
RELATED See the lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 881.
Cursor at origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor.
NOTE Revit Building projects are based on a coordinate system; however, this system is not exposed to the
user.
Cursor at base point: Not applicable for linked Revit Building Files. This option is grayed out.
Cursor at center: The center of the linked document is at the cursor location.
This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Because training files are used in multiple
tutorials and are normally installed as read-only, you need to copy the three training files to a different
directory and make them writable. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer, you can do
so. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site, c_Townhouse,
c_Condo_Complex. Otherwise, use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
4 On the File menu, click Save As, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step, and save
the file there.
5 On the File menu, click Close.
6 Repeat the previous four steps for the following files:
c_Townhouse
c_Condo_Complex
7 Open the Model Linking folder, select the three files, right-click, and click Properties.
8 Clear Read-only, and click OK.
All three files now reside, with write permission, in the Model Linking folder that you created.
Select c_Site.
Click Open.
NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Because model linking and
sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units, you do not need to change the project units to metric.
If you wish to do so, you can go to the Settings menu, click Project Units, and make your changes.
10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.
Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.
13 Click Open.
The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model.
The Move command requires two clicks. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click
specifies the move endpoint.
16 For the move start point, click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.
17 For the move endpoint, click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.
After you specify the location to move to, the linked file is displayed within the confines of the blue detail
lines.
21 Click Open.
The townhouse building model is displayed above the site model.
To rotate an object, you first specify the rotation start point, and then click to specify the end of the rotation.
In this case, the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.
24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and, when the vertical line displays, click to specify the
rotation start point.
25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise, and click to specify the end of the rotation.
This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of
the site model. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.
27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.
28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.
The Copy command works much like the Move command. The first click specifies the start point, and the
second click specifies the copy-to point.
30 For the starting point, select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.
31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.
A copy of the townhouse is displayed on the right side of the site project.
32 On the Edit menu, click Rotate, and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees.
NOTE After you rotate the townhouse, if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines, use the Move
command to make any adjustments.
33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.
34 On the Options Bar, click
35 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Identity data, for Name, enter Townhouse A, and click OK.
36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.
37 On the View toolbar, click
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have
not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing.
2 Using the Dynamic View tool, hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following
illustration.
Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. This is
apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.
3 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.
In the steps that follow, you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project.
When using the Align command, you first select the plane you want to align to, and then select the plane
that you want to align. In this case, you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan.
7 On the Tools toolbar, click
8 elect the Level 1 line of the Site project, move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse
project, and click to select it.
Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays
for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the
model.
9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North.
10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining
townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.
14 Using the Dynamic View tool, hold the Shift key down and spin the model until it resembles the following
illustration.
6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog box, click Custom.
If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be
set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom.
7 Click the Annotations Categories tab.
8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>.
9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels.
10 Click OK.
11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click OK.
Notice the Level lines for both townhouses are no longer displayed.
NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still are displayed in the
remaining elevation views.
Apply halftone
12 On the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1.
13 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics.
14 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box, click the Revit Links tab.
15 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt.
Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.
16 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK.
Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the
entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply
halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses are displayed in halftone.
20 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog box, on the Basics tab, select Custom.
21 Click the Model Categories tab.
22 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>.
23 By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the
detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting
custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for
each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse,
medium, or fine.
In this case, no detail level changes are required.
24 Click OK.
11 Click OK.
Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.
TIP In the Manage Links dialog box, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different
location.
Linking building models with Worksharing enabled
In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should
consider the following:
Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify
which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Add Link dialog box, under Open Worksets, select
Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened
and drawn.
Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked
files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this,
go to the Manage Links dialog box and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the
additional worksets you need opened.
Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled
building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host
project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked
files.
Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must
keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the
link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed
in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you
should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.
TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the
host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not
to open that workset, the link is not loaded.
12 On the File menu, click Save As.
13 In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the
file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important
that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects.
In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson,
you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects.
If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Publish coordinates
1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, select Location 1, and click OK.
On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Building is waiting for you
to select another link.
5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share the same coordinate
system.
In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked
file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing.
3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not
Shared.
4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked
models, a dialog box is displayed telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to
choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation.
5 In the Share Coordinates dialog box:
13 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location.
In the Choose Location dialog box, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates.
This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile
coordinates once.
14 In the Choose Location dialog box, select Move instance to.
Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link
already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that
location.
15 In the Choose Location dialog box, select the second option, Record current position as.
Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location.
16 Click Change.
17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK.
18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK.
19 In the Select Location dialog box, click OK.
20 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.
You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B.
Save locations
21 On the File menu, click Manage Links.
22 In the Manage Links dialog box, click the RVT tab, and then select the townhouse project.
23 Click Save Locations.
24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog box, select Save, and click OK.
When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location,
you must go to the Manage Links dialog box and save the locations there.
NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted
to save the locations to the linked files.
25 In the Manage Links dialog box, notice the Locations Not Saved checkbox for the townhouse project is no
longer checked.
26 Click OK.
27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release
the mouse button, a warning is displayed.
You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location.
You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action.
28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.
You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you
relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are
moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates.
Relocate a project
29 On the View menu, click Zoom Zoom to Fit.
30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation Relocate this Project.
This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move
endpoint.
31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.
32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.
Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are
offset the distance that you moved the origin.
33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position.
34 On the File menu, click Save.
35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog box, select Save, and click OK.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the
host project with respect to the linked projects.
Comments
Cost
In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project, you can sort the schedule data and
display a single table entry per door type.
Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type, the schedule lists the total count for each
door type, and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.
12 On the File menu, click Save.
13 On the File menu, click Close.
NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one
of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Building.
In this exercise, you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. You also sorted the
schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Link a project
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor.
This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project
file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file.
2 On the File menu, click Import/Link RVT.
3 In the Add Link dialog box:
Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial.
Select c_Condo_Complex.
Click Open.
Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project.
4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.
The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The
current active location is Lot A.
NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view.
In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the
townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes.
In the final exercise of this tutorial, you manage the shared locations.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you
have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing.
Manage locations
1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations.
2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, click Duplicate.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter Lot C, and click OK.
4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box, click OK.
Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can
select Lot C if necessary.
891
26
In this tutorial, you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building 9.1 working environment. In the
first lesson, you modify the system environment, which is independent of the project settings. In the
second lesson, you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and
subcomponents within that project. Finally, you create an office template, and set it as your default
template.
893
16 Click OK.
17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.
19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall.
Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.
Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.
22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars.
Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. This setting controls
only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.
23 On the File menu, click Close.
24 When prompted to save, click No.
25 On the File menu, click Open.
26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
27 Open the m_Settings.rvt file located in the Metric folder.
Notice that the system settings apply to this project.
28 On the Settings menu, click Options.
29 In the Options dialog box, click the Graphics tab and make the following changes:
Under Notifications, select your preferred Save Reminder interval, and select Normal for Tooltip
Assistance.
Under Username, enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Your login name displays by
default.
Under Journal File Cleanup, select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals
older than (days).
Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Journal files
are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. These files are used
primarily in the software support process. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate
lost steps or files. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session.
31 Click OK.
Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you
place the cursor over any building component.
32 On the File menu, click Close. If prompted, do not save the changes.
33 Proceed to the next exercise, Specifying File Locations on page 896.
When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit Building file, you can click on the library folder located
in the left pane of the dialog box. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in
the left pane of the dialog box.
11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library, and change the name to My Library.
12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library, and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the
field.
13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit
Building projects, templates, or families, and click OK.
TIP You may want to create a new folder first, and select it as the library path.
The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open, Save, Load, and Import dialog boxes.
The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box.
14 Under Library Name, click My Library.
15 Click
7 Under Dimension Snaps, click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000;
and enter 500 ;.
8 Under Object Snaps, notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option.
These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. For example, if you
want to snap an object to a wall midpoint, enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you
commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint, snapping reverts to the system default
settings.
9 In the Snaps dialog box, click OK.
10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall.
11 Click in the center of the drawing area, and move the cursor to the right.
Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not, zoom out until it does
so.
A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. This
dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries.
TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching, use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel
button, you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. While sketching, you can also use
the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out.
12 While sketching a generic straight wall, zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to
500 mm.
This is the increment that you added previously.
Notice that when snapping is turned off completely, the listening dimension reflects the exact length of
the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.
14 Click to set the wall endpoint.
15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall, and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end
point.
Notice that snapping is once again active. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping, the command
is only active for one click of the mouse.
This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.
19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.
This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the
exterior wall face, you render a region to observe the changes.
Dataset
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
to select a texture.
6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\, select Stone04, and under Name, select Normal.
7 In the Material Library dialog box, on the Material menu, click New Use Current Material as Template.
8 In the Material Editor dialog box, click the Maps tab.
9 Select the entry under Image Mapping, and click Edit.
10 In the Image Mapping dialog box, click the Orientation tab.
11 Under Offset, enter 0.75 for X and Y, and click OK.
By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map, you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns
within the rendering.
12 In the Material Editor dialog box, click OK.
13 In the Save Material As dialog box, enter Masonry - Fieldstone for the name, select user from the list of
libraries, and click OK.
The AccuRender texture Masonry - Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library.
14 In the Material Library dialog box, click OK.
Before closing the Materials dialog box, notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. In the next exercise,
you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry - Fieldstone material.
15 Click OK.
24 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Fieldstone for Name, and click OK.
This is the material you created previously.
25 Click OK three times.
The lower wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it.
26 Select the left exterior wall.
27 Press CTRL, and select the rear exterior wall.
28 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU.
All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.
30 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.
Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick, and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. This
is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. In the following
exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 905, you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to
this material.
31 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Region Raytrace.
TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Rendering.
32 In the drawing area, drag a rectangle around the 3D image.
33 In the Scene Selection dialog, for Type, select Exterior, and click OK.
After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model and select the scene, the rendering process begins.
When finished, the fieldstone material that you created is displayed.
TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail, click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.
Zoom into the model, select Region Raytrace, and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render.
Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. In the exercise,
Controlling Object Styles on page 907, you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this.
34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar, click Display Model.
35 On the File menu, click Save As.
36 Navigate to a folder of your preference, and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
37 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 905.
In the Materials dialog box, notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry - Fieldstone
material.
19 Under Surface Pattern, click
20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, under Pattern Type, select Model.
21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern, and click OK.
22 In the Materials dialog box, click OK.
23 Click OK three times.
The west wall of the building displays as solid fill.
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.
25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.
TIP If the pattern does not display, adjust your zoom settings as needed.
27 On the File menu, click Save.
2 On the keyboard, use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three windows
facing you.
3 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Shading with Edges.
4 Select one of the rectangular windows.
5 On the Options Bar, click
25 In the Material Library dialog, expand Solid Colors, and select Reds and Oranges.
26 Under Name, select Indian,Dark,Glossy, and click OK.
27 Under Surface Pattern, click the Color value, select a red color, and click OK.
28 In the Materials dialog, click OK.
29 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.
Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.
6 Click OK twice.
You have created a new line pattern; now you must apply it. There are two ways to apply the line style to
the roof. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view, or
you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views.
7 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style, and click Hidden Line.
8 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles.
9 In the Object Styles dialog box, under Category, select Roofs.
10 Select Red for Line Color, and select Roof Line for Line Pattern.
11 Click OK.
The line style is applied to the roof in the view.
NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera
view where you expect to see a solid line. Plans, sections, elevations, and orthogonal 3D views show line color
and pattern.
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 03 Roof.
23 Click OK twice.
29 Click OK.
30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Lines.
31 In the Type Selector, select Zoning Setback.
32 In the Options Bar, specify the following:
Click
Click
NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view, use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting
tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created, as if they are placed on an
overlay of the view.
Modifying Annotations
In this exercise, you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You
also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window
type.
NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that
exercise, m_Settings-in progress.rvt.
7 Click OK twice.
You have created a new dimension style.
8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension.
9 In the Type Selector, select Linear - Metric, and place a dimension on the floor plan.
10 On the Standard toolbar, click
Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged, and that the tags display the window type rather
than the window instance number.
13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.
14 On the Options Bar, click
15 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.
The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the steps that follow, you load a
new window tag that displays the window instance mark.
16 Click Cancel.
17 On the Settings menu, click Annotations Loaded Tags.
18 In the Tags dialog box, under Category, scroll down to Windows.
Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.
19 Click Load.
20 In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\
M_Window Tag - Number.rfa.
In the preview image, notice that the label displays 1i. This indicates this tag is designed to display the
window instance value rather than the type value.
21 Click Open.
22 In the Tags dialog box, scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag - Number is now the assigned
tag.
This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.
23 Under Loaded Tags, click M_Window Tag - Number, and select the drop-down arrow that displays.
Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Leave M_Window
Tag - Number as the assigned tag.
24 Click OK.
25 Press and hold CTRL, select the 3 window tags, and press Delete.
26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag By Category.
27 On the Options Bar, clear Leader.
28 On the west wall, click the bottom window.
A window instance tag displays on the selected window.
Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Any new view created using this scale is
automatically assigned the detail level Medium.
12 Click OK.
13 On the File menu, click Save.
14 On the File menu, click Close.
15 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 917.
In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon.
Completed Project-Structure
Completed Project
18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box, click the Folders tab, and specify the following:
19 Click OK.
20 In the Browser Organization dialog box, select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization,
and click OK.
21 In the Project Browser, under Views, expand Complete, expand 3D Views, and expand both Architectural
and Structural.
Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase, View
Type (Family and Type), and Discipline.
22 On the File menu, click Close.
If you want to save this file, navigate to your preferred directory, enter a unique file name, and click OK.
Proceed to the next lesson, Creating an Office Template on page 919.
In this lesson, you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. All the settings
that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can also save these settings in a template file. By saving
these settings as a template and using it throughout the office, you maintain consistent standards and reduce the
amount of repetitive work. In the lesson that follows, you create an office template.
Materials
Fill patterns
Object styles
Annotations
Project units
Temporary dimensions
Detail levels
In addition to the list above, there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that
can be saved in a template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise.
During this exercise, specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt
the template to your needs. For more details on modifying these settings, see the previous lesson, Modifying System
Settings on page 894 or refer to the Help documentation.
If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template, you can do so by going to
the Material menu and selecting New. Choose the appropriate option, and create the AccuRender material.
RELATED See Modifying System Settings on page 894 for more information on creating new AccuRender
materials.
When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template, be aware that access
to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You may want to save the material to a
library located on a network path.
4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes.
Modify arrowheads
34 On the Settings menu, click Annotations Arrowheads.
The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes, tags, and dimensions.
35 Select the Type drop-down list, and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.
To see the details of a particular style, select it from this list.
36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.
37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead.
38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style, click Duplicate, name the style, and specify the properties.
39 Click OK.
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
Project Parameters
Phases
Settings Menu
Command
Associated Tutorial
Considerations
View Templates
Render Scene
Site Settings
74 Proceed to the next exercise, Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 925.
Steps:
In the Element Properties dialog box, select Load. Navigate to the directory containing
the door type. Select it, and click Open.
In the Element Properties dialog box, select Edit/New. Make modifications, and click
OK.
In the Element Properties dialog box, select Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Enter Name,
and click OK. Modify type properties, and click OK.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.
You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this
tab. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.
6 On the File menu, click Load from Library.
Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Loading from the library is the quickest
when you know exactly what families you want to load. Press ESC twice to return to the template.
Notice that each family category is listed. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.
8 Expand Annotation Symbols.
Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template
you started with.)
9 Expand the titleblock, and select the titleblock type.
11 Click Preview.
This titleblock is currently part of the template. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. You
may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.
To load a titleblock, click Load. For more information, see Creating a Titleblock Family on page 515.
12 Click OK.
You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. To do so, right-click the
component, and click Delete.
13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps, load, create, or modify any component families or
groups as necessary.
14 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying Views and View Templates on page 927.
14 Select the Architectural Plan template, click Apply, and click OK.
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Site.
16 On the View menu, click Apply View Template.
17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template, select Site Plan, click Apply, and then click OK.
NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. This would result in the Site Plan view
template becoming the default template for all new plan views.
18 If you modified any other view templates, open the view from the Project Browser, and apply the appropriate
template.
Create 3D views
28 To add 3D views to the template, click
You can use this tool, Dynamically Modify View, to orient and save the view.
34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box.
35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target.
40 Click OK.
41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template.
Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky, and changes the color automatically depending on the
sun and sky conditions.
Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering.
2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors.
3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors.
Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. Choose from bitmap, tiff, jpeg, or targa.
Background images are available from the AccuRender software, which is included on the Revit Building
CD. Be sure that you have installed this software; if not, you can install AccuRender by running the
install program on the Revit Building CD.
Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information),
if one exists.
Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. This
works on opaque faces only. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Back face culling decreases
rendering time and space; however, the quality also is lower.
Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. This
setting is effective for region raytraces.
Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft, Medium, Good, Better,
Best.
Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the
solution. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts, such as jaggy shadows or light
leaks, but also increases the solution time.
Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. This value
is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any
subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar.
Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Higher values
cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface.
Meaningful values are between 0 and 1.
Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft, Medium, Good,
Better, Best.
Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better
resolve the value of the pixel. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Draft
provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best is the slowest, but provides the highest quality.
Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Shadows based on the size of the light
source are calculated.
Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass.
Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. This is
a very time consuming operation but, when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft
shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts.
The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that
are available after exporting to other CAD programs. Revit Building presets the layer names to American
Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers.txt
for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn.txt for MicroStation), and then are exported along with your project into
the appropriate CAD program. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building
program installation directory.
TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Layer name
corresponds to level name for MicroStation.
2 For each category, specify the following:
3 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
6 If you modified the settings in this dialog, select Save As, name the file, and click Save.
Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category.
When scheduling, you normally schedule a single category: rooms, doors, windows, and so on. When you create a
multi-category schedule, it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter.
In this exercise, detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. If you are unfamiliar
with shared parameters, project parameters, and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules, see Scheduling
Shared Parameters on page 234 or Scheduling Project Parameters on page 243. If you do not need to make changes to
shared or project parameters, you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson, Creating Named
Print Settings.
26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter, and assign which
categories this parameter applies to.
27 Click OK.
28 Add shared project parameters as needed, and click OK when finished.
TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer.
11 Click OK when finished.
Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it.